JP2009182575A - Communicating system - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To establish a method of notifying a paging signal of a mobile terminal in a cell dedicated to MBMS where only a downlink is provided but an uplink is not provided. <P>SOLUTION: In a communication system using an OFDM system as a down access system and using an SC-FDMA system as an up access system, and capable of transmitting broadcast type data for providing an MBMS, i.e. one-to-multiple type broadcast communication system services, to a mobile terminal and one-to-one type individual communication data to a mobile terminal, a paging signal for notifying occurrence of termination of the individual communication data to a mobile terminal is transmitted while being mapped to an MBSFN subframe used in MBMS communication out of a plurality of subframes included in a wireless frame. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2009,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a mobile communication system in which a base station performs radio communication with a plurality of mobile terminals, and in particular, mobile communication capable of providing a broadcast type multimedia service (MBMS: Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service) to mobile terminals. It is about the system.

  Among the communication systems called third generation, commercial services have been started in Japan since 2001 for the W-CDMA (Wideband Code division Multiple Access) system. In addition, by adding a packet transmission channel (HS-DSCH: High Speed-Downlink Shared Channel) to the downlink (dedicated data channel, dedicated control channel), further speeding up data transmission using the downlink The HSDPA (High Speed Down Link Packet Access) service to be realized has been started. In addition, an HSUPA (High Speed Up Link Packet Access) system is also standardized in order to further increase the speed of data transmission in the uplink direction. W-CDMA is a communication system defined by 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project), which is a standardization organization for mobile communication systems, and standardized release 7 editions are compiled.

  In 3GPP, as a communication method different from W-CDMA, “Long Term Evolution LTE” is used for the radio section, and “System Architecture Evolution” is used for the entire system configuration including the core network (System Architecture Evolution). A new communication method called “Evolution SAE” is being studied. In LTE, the access method, wireless channel configuration, and protocol are completely different from those of current W-CDMA (HSDPA / HSUPA). For example, while W-CDMA uses Code Division Multiple Access, W-CDMA uses OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) in the downlink direction and SC-FDMA (Single in the uplink direction). Career Frequency Division Multiple Access) is used. The bandwidth is selectable for each base station within 1.4 / 3/5/10/15/20 MHz in LTE, whereas W-CDMA is 5 MHz. Also, LTE does not include circuit switching as in W-CDMA, and is only a packet communication system.

  LTE is defined as an independent radio access network separate from the W-CDMA network because the communication system is configured using a new core network different from the W-CDMA core network (GPRS). Therefore, in order to distinguish from a W-CDMA communication system, in an LTE communication system, a base station (Base station) that communicates with a mobile terminal (UE: User Equipment) is an eNB (E-UTRAN NodeB), and a plurality of base stations. A base station controller (Radio Network Controller) that exchanges control data and user data with each other is called an EPC (Evolved Packet Core) (sometimes called an aGW: Access Gateway). In the LTE communication system, a unicast service and an E-MBMS service (Evolved Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service) are provided. The E-MBMS service is a broadcast-type multimedia service, and may be simply referred to as MBMS. Mass broadcast contents such as news, weather forecasts, and mobile broadcasts are transmitted to a plurality of mobile terminals. This is also called a point-to-multipoint service.

  Non-Patent Document 1 describes the current decisions regarding the overall architecture of the LTE system in 3GPP. The overall architecture (Chapter 4 of Non-Patent Document 1) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration of an LTE communication system. In FIG. 1, a control protocol (for example, RRC (Radio Resource Management)) and a user plane (for example, PDCP: Packet Data Convergence Protocol, RLC: Radio Link Control, MAC: Medium Access Control, PHY: Physical layer) for the mobile terminal 101 are based. If terminated at station 102, Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRAN) is composed of one or more base stations 102. The base station 102 performs scheduling (Scheduling) and transmission of a paging signal (also referred to as a paging message or paging message) notified from the MME 103 (Mobility Management Entity). Base stations 102 are connected to each other via an X2 interface. The base station 102 is connected to an EPC (Evolved Packet Core) via an S1 interface, more specifically, connected to an MME 103 (Mobility Management Entity) via an S1_MME interface, and connected to an S-GW 104 (Serving Gateway) via an S1_U interface. The The MME 103 distributes the paging signal to a plurality or a single base station 102. Further, the MME 103 performs mobility control (Mobility control) in an idle state. The S-GW 104 transmits / receives user data to / from one or a plurality of base stations 102.

  Non-Patent Document 1 (Chapter 5) describes the current decisions regarding the frame configuration in the LTE system in 3GPP. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration of a radio frame used in the LTE communication system. In FIG. 2, one radio frame is 10 ms. The radio frame is divided into 10 equally sized sub-frames. The subframe is divided into two equally sized slots. A downlink synchronization channel (SCH) is included in the first (# 0) and sixth (# 5) subframes for each frame. The synchronization signal includes a first synchronization channel (Primary Synchronization Channel: P-SCH) and a second synchronization channel (Secondary Synchronization Channel: S-SCH). Channels other than MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network) and channels other than MBSFN are multiplexed on a subframe basis. Hereinafter, a subframe for MBSFN transmission is referred to as an MBSFN subframe. Non-Patent Document 2 describes a signaling example at the time of MBSFN subframe allocation. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the MBSFN frame. In FIG. 3, an MBSFN subframe is allocated for each MBSFN frame (MBSFN frame). A set of MBSFN frames (MBSFN frame Cluster) is scheduled. A repetition period (Repetition Period) of a set of MBSFN frames is assigned.

  Non-Patent Document 1 describes the current decisions regarding the channel configuration in the LTE system in 3GPP. A physical channel (Chapter 5 of Non-Patent Document 1) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating physical channels used in the LTE communication system. In FIG. 4, a physical broadcast channel 401 (Physical Broadcast channel: PBCH) is a downlink channel transmitted from the base station 102 to the mobile terminal 101. A BCH transport block is mapped to four subframes in a 40 ms interval. There is no obvious signaling of 40ms timing. A physical control format indicator channel 402 (Physical Control format indicator channel: PCFICH) is transmitted from the base station 102 to the mobile terminal 101. PCFICH notifies base station 102 to mobile terminal 101 about the number of OFDM symbols used for PDCCHs. PCFICH is transmitted for each subframe. A physical downlink control channel 403 (Physical downlink control channel: PDCCH) is a downlink channel transmitted from the base station 102 to the mobile terminal 101. The PDCCH includes resource allocation, HARQ information related to DL-SCH (a downlink shared channel that is one of the transport channels shown in FIG. 5), and PCH (paging that is one of the transport channels shown in FIG. 5). Channel). The PDCCH carries an Uplink Scheduling Grant. The PDCCH carries ACK / Nack that is a response signal for uplink transmission. A physical downlink shared channel 404 (PDSCH) is a downlink channel transmitted from the base station 102 to the mobile terminal 101. On the PDSCH, a DL-SCH (downlink shared channel) that is a transport channel is mapped. A physical multicast channel 405 (Physical multicast channel: PMCH) is a downlink channel transmitted from the base station 102 to the mobile terminal 101. PMCH is mapped with MCH (multicast channel) which is a transport channel.

  A physical uplink control channel 406 (Physical Uplink control channel: PUCCH) is an uplink channel transmitted from the mobile terminal 101 to the base station 102. The PUCCH carries ACK / Nack which is a response signal (response) to downlink transmission. PUCCH carries a CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) report. CQI is quality information indicating the quality of received data or channel quality. A physical uplink shared channel 407 (Physical Uplink shared channel: PUSCH) is an uplink channel transmitted from the mobile terminal 101 to the base station 102. PUSCH is mapped with UL-SCH (uplink shared channel which is one of the transport channels shown in FIG. 5). A physical HARQ indicator channel 408 (Physical Hybrid ARQ indicator channel: PHICH) is a downlink channel transmitted from the base station 102 to the mobile terminal 101. The PHICH carries ACK / Nack that is a response to uplink transmission. A physical random access channel 409 (Physical random access channel: PRACH) is an uplink channel transmitted from the mobile terminal 101 to the base station 102. The PRACH carries a random access preamble.

  A transport channel (Chapter 5 of Non-Patent Document 1) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a transport channel used in an LTE communication system. FIG. 5A shows mapping between the downlink transport channel and the downlink physical channel. FIG. 5B shows mapping between the uplink transport channel and the uplink physical channel. For the downlink transport channel, a broadcast channel (BCH) is broadcast to the entire base station (cell). BCH is mapped to the physical broadcast channel (PBCH). Retransmission control by HARQ (Hybrid ARQ) is applied to the downlink shared channel (DL-SCH). Broadcasting to the entire base station (cell) is possible. Supports dynamic or semi-static resource allocation. Quasi-static resource allocation is also called Persistent Scheduling. In order to reduce power consumption of the mobile terminal, DRX (Discontinuous reception) of the mobile terminal is supported. DL-SCH is mapped to a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH). A paging channel (Paging channel: PCH) supports DRX of the mobile terminal in order to enable low power consumption of the mobile terminal. Notification to the entire base station (cell) is required. It is mapped to a physical resource such as a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) that can be dynamically used for traffic, or a physical resource such as a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) of another control channel. A multicast channel (Multicast channel: MCH) is used for broadcast to the entire base station (cell). Supports SFN combining of MBMS services (MTCH and MCCH) in multi-cell transmission. Supports quasi-static resource allocation. MCH is mapped to PMCH.

  Retransmission control by HARQ (Hybrid ARQ) is applied to the uplink shared channel (UL-SCH). Supports dynamic or semi-static resource allocation. UL-SCH is mapped to a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH). The random access channel (Random access channel: RACH) shown in FIG. 5B is limited to control information. There is a risk of collision. The RACH is mapped to a physical random access channel (PRACH). HARQ will be described.

  HARQ is a technique for improving the communication quality of a transmission path by combining automatic repeat request and error correction (forward error correction). There is also an advantage that error correction functions effectively by retransmission even for a transmission path in which communication quality changes. In particular, further quality improvement can be obtained by combining the reception result of the initial transmission and the reception result of the retransmission upon retransmission. An example of the retransmission method will be described. When the reception data cannot be decoded correctly on the receiving side (when a CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check error occurs (CRC = NG)), “Nack” is transmitted from the receiving side to the transmitting side. The transmission side that has received “Nack” retransmits the data. When the reception data can be correctly decoded on the reception side (when no CRC error occurs (CRC = OK)), “Ack” is transmitted from the reception side to the transmission side. The transmitting side that has received “Ack” transmits the next data. An example of the HARQ method is “Chase Combining”. Chase combining is a method in which the same data sequence is transmitted for initial transmission and retransmission, and the gain is improved by combining the initial transmission data sequence and the retransmission data sequence in retransmission. The idea is that even if there is an error in the initial transmission data, it is partially accurate, and it is possible to transmit data with higher accuracy by combining the initial transmission data and the retransmission data of the correct part. Based on. Another example of the HARQ scheme is IR (Incremental Redundancy). IR is to increase the redundancy. By transmitting parity bits in retransmission, the redundancy is increased in combination with the initial transmission, and the quality is improved by the error correction function.

  The logical channel (Chapter 6 of Non-Patent Document 1) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating logical channels used in an LTE communication system. FIG. 6A shows mapping between the downlink logical channel and the downlink transport channel. FIG. 6B shows mapping between the uplink logical channel and the uplink transport channel. A broadcast control channel (BCCH) is a downlink channel for broadcast system control information. The BCCH that is a logical channel is mapped to a broadcast channel (BCH) that is a transport channel or a downlink shared channel (DL-SCH). A paging control channel (Paging control channel: PCCH) is a downlink channel for transmitting a paging signal. PCCH is used when the network does not know the cell location of the mobile terminal. The PCCH that is a logical channel is mapped to a paging channel (PCH) that is a transport channel. The common control channel (CCCH) is a channel for transmission control information between the mobile terminal and the base station. CCCH is used when the mobile terminal does not have an RRC connection with the network. Whether the CCCH is provided downstream is not determined at this time. In the uplink direction, the CCCH is mapped to an uplink shared channel (UL-SCH) that is a transport channel.

  A multicast control channel (MCCH) is a downlink channel for one-to-many transmission. This is a channel used for transmission of MBMS control information for one or several MTCHs from the network to the mobile terminal. MCCH is a channel used only for a mobile terminal that is receiving MBMS. MCCH is mapped to a downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) or multicast channel (MCH) which is a transport channel. The dedicated control channel (Dedicated control channel: DCCH) is a channel for transmitting dedicated control information between the mobile terminal and the network. The DCCH is mapped to the uplink shared channel (UL-SCH) in the uplink, and is mapped to the downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) in the downlink. The dedicated traffic channel (Dedicate Traffic channel: DTCH) is a channel for one-to-one communication to individual mobile terminals for transmitting user information. DTCH exists for both uplink and downlink. The DTCH is mapped to the uplink shared channel (UL-SCH) in the uplink, and is mapped to the downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) in the downlink. A multicast traffic channel (Multicast Traffic channel: MTCH) is a downlink channel for transmitting traffic data from a network to a mobile terminal. MTCH is a channel used only for a mobile terminal that is receiving MBMS. The MTCH is mapped to the downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) or multicast channel (MCH).

  Non-Patent Document 1 describes the current decisions regarding the E-MBMS service in 3GPP. The definition of words related to E-MBMS (Chapter 15 of Non-Patent Document 1) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the relationship between the MBSFN synchronization area and the MBSFN area. In FIG. 7, an MBSFN synchronization area 701 (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network Synchronization Area) is an area of a network in which all base stations can synchronize and execute MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service Single Frequency Network) transmission. That is. The MBSFN synchronization area includes one or more MBSFN areas (MBSFN Areas) 702. In one frequency layer, a base station can belong to only one MBSFN synchronization area. The MBSFN area 702 (MBSFN Area) includes a group of base stations (cells) included in the MBSFN synchronization area of the network. A base station (cell) in the MBSFN synchronization area may constitute a plurality of MBSFN areas.

  The logical structure (Logical Architecture) of E-MBMS will be described with reference to FIG. 8 (Chapter 15 of Non-Patent Document 1). FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a logical structure (Logical Architecture) of E-MBMS. In FIG. 8, a multi-cell / multicast coordination entity (MCE) is a logical entity. The MCE 801 allocates radio resources to all base stations in the MBSFN area in order to perform multi-cell MBMS transmission. In addition to time and / or frequency radio resource allocation, the MCE 801 determines the details of the radio structure (eg, modulation scheme, code, etc.). The E-MBMS gateway 802 (MBMS GW) is a logical entity. The E-MBMS gateway 802 is located between the eBMSC and the base station, and the main function is to transmit / broadcast the MBMS service to each base station using the SYNC protocol. The M3 interface is a control plane interface between the MCE 801 and the E-MBMS gateway 802. The M2 interface is a control interface between the MCE 801 and the eNB 102. The M1 interface is a user data interface (User Plane Interface) between the E-MBMS gateway 802 and the eNB 102.

  The architecture (Architecture) of E-MBMS (Chapter 15 of Non-Patent Document 1) will be described. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the architecture (Architecture) of E-MBMS. Two E-MBMS architectures are considered as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B. The MBMS cell will be described (Non-Patent Document 115). The LTE system includes an MBMS dedicated cell (base station) (MBMS-dedicated cell) and an MBMS / Unicast-mixed cell (MBMS / Unicast-mixed cell) capable of executing both MBMS and unicast services. The MBMS dedicated cell will be described. The characteristics when the MBMS dedicated cell belongs to the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission will be described below. Hereinafter, the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer is also referred to as the MBMS dedicated cell frequency layer. Both the downlink logical channels MTCH (multicast traffic channel) and MCCH (multicast control channel) are mapped to the downlink transport channel MCH (multicast channel) or DL-SCH (downlink shared channel) in one-to-many transmission. The There is no uplink in the MBMS dedicated cell. In addition, unicast data cannot be transmitted / received within the MBMS dedicated cell. Also, no counting mechanism is set. Whether to provide paging signals (Paging messages) in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission is undecided.

  Next, the MBMS / unicast mixed cell will be described. The characteristics when the MBMS / unicast mixed cell does not belong to the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission will be described below. A frequency layer other than the MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer is referred to as a “unicast / mixed frequency layer”. Both MTCH and MCCH, which are downlink logical channels, are mapped to MCH or DL-SCH, which is a downlink logical channel, in one-to-many transmission. In an MBMS / unicast mixed cell, both unicast data and MBMS data can be transmitted.

  MBMS transmission (Chapter 15 of Non-Patent Document 1) will be described. MBMS transmission in the LTE system supports single-cell transmission (SC transmission) and multi-cell transmission (MC transmission). Single cell transmission does not support SFN (Single Frequency Network) operation. Multi-cell transmission supports SFN operation. MBMS transmission is synchronized in an MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network) area. SFN combining (Combining) of MBMS services (MTCH and MCCH) in multi-cell transmission is supported. MTCH and MCCH are mapped to MCH by one-to-many transmission. Scheduling is performed by the MCE.

  A multicast control channel (MCCH) structure (Structure) will be described (Chapter 15 of Non-Patent Document). A broadcast control channel (BCCH) that is a downlink logical channel indicates scheduling of one or two primary multicast control channels (Primary MCCH: P-MCCH). The P-MCCH for single cell transmission is mapped to DL-SCH (downlink shared channel). Further, the P-MCCH for multi-cell transmission is mapped to MCH (multicast channel). When the secondary multicast control channel (Secondary MCCH: S-MCCH) is mapped on the MCH, the primary multicast control channel (P-MCCH) can be used to indicate the address of the secondary multicast control channel (S-MCCH). The broadcast control channel (BCCH) indicates a resource of the primary multicast control channel (P-MCCH), but does not indicate an available service.

  Non-Patent Document 1 (Chapter 10) describes the current decisions regarding paging in 3GPP. The paging group uses the L1 / L2 signaling channel (PDCCH). A clear identifier (UE-ID) of the mobile terminal can be confirmed on the paging channel (PCH).

3GPP TS36.300 V8.2.0

3GPP R1-072963

  The first problem to be solved by the invention will be described. In Non-Patent Document 1, it is not determined whether a paging signal exists in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. Therefore, the notification method of the paging signal for the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission and the mobile communication system have not been determined. It is an object of the present invention to disclose a paging signal notification method and a mobile communication system for a mobile terminal receiving an MBMS service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission.

  The second problem to be solved by the invention will be described. When transmitting a paging signal in the frequency layer dedicated for MBMS transmission, the mobile terminal that has received the paging signal needs to respond. However, there is no uplink in the MBMS dedicated cell. Therefore, the mobile terminal needs to transmit a response to the paging signal to the unicast cell or the MBMS / unicast mixed cell. It is an object of the present invention to disclose a method for transmitting a response to a paging signal to a unicast cell or an MBMS / unicast mixed cell by a mobile terminal that has received the paging signal, and a mobile communication system therefor.

  The third problem to be solved by the invention will be described. Even in a mobile terminal that is in an idle state at a frequency (unicast / mixed frequency layer) that is not a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, details of a paging message notification method have not been established. Non-Patent Document 1 discloses that PCH is mapped to PDSCH or PDCCH. Non-Patent Document 1 discloses that the paging group uses the L1 / L2 signaling channel (PDCCH), and that a clear identifier (UE-ID) of the mobile terminal can be found on the PCH. On the other hand, there is no disclosure of how mobile terminals are divided into paging groups and how PCHs are notified. Also, there is no disclosure of how the mobile terminal performs intermittent reception in a standby state. It is an object of the present invention to disclose details of a method of notifying a paging signal to a mobile terminal waiting in a unicast / mixed frequency layer and a mobile communication system therefor.

  The fourth problem to be solved by the invention will be described. Non-Patent Document 1 discloses the existence of a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission and the presence and characteristics of an MBMS dedicated cell. On the other hand, there is no disclosure of a method for moving a mobile terminal to a frequency layer dedicated for MBMS transmission or a method for selecting a desired service. Furthermore, the existence of a plurality of MBSFN areas is discussed in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, but there is no disclosure of a method for multiplexing MBSFN areas. An object of the present invention is to disclose a method for multiplexing MBSFN areas. It is another object of the present invention to disclose a method for selecting a desired service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission according to a multiplexing method, and a mobile communication system therefor.

  The present invention uses an OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) scheme as a downlink access scheme, an SC-FDMA (Single Career Frequency Division Multiple Access) scheme as an uplink access scheme, and provides a one-to-many broadcast communication service for mobile terminals. MBMS (Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service) providing broadcast type data and one-to-one type individual communication data to the mobile terminal are communicated, so that a plurality of MBMS communication channels and individual communication channels are multiplexed. In a mobile communication system including a subframe and using a radio frame identified by a system frame number, a unicast cell in which a mobile terminal can transmit and receive the dedicated communication data, and the mobile terminal includes the broadcast type data Can be received, but the transmission and reception of the individual communication data is MBMS dedicated cell, 3 types of unicast / MBMS mixed cell that can provide services for both the unicast cell and the MBMS dedicated cell, and multiple MBMS dedicated cells are synchronized with each other on a single frequency. MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast Single Frequency Network) synchronization area is provided, and among the multiple subframes included in the radio frame, MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network) subframe used for MBMS communication, A paging signal for notifying the mobile terminal that an incoming communication data has arrived is included.

  The present invention uses an OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) scheme as a downlink access scheme, an SC-FDMA (Single Career Frequency Division Multiple Access) scheme as an uplink access scheme, and provides a one-to-many broadcast communication service for mobile terminals. MBMS (Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service) providing broadcast type data and one-to-one type individual communication data to the mobile terminal are communicated, so that a plurality of MBMS communication channels and individual communication channels are multiplexed. In a mobile communication system including a subframe and using a radio frame identified by a system frame number, a unicast cell in which a mobile terminal can transmit and receive the dedicated communication data, and the mobile terminal includes the broadcast type data Can be received, but the transmission and reception of the individual communication data is MBMS dedicated cell, and unicast / MBMS mixed cell that can provide services for both the unicast cell and the MBMS dedicated cell, and multiple MBMS dedicated cells are synchronized with each other on a single frequency. MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast Single Frequency Network) synchronization area is provided, and among the multiple subframes included in the radio frame, MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network) subframe used for MBMS communication, Since the paging signal for notifying the mobile terminal that the individual communication data has arrived is included, the paging signal can be transmitted from the MBMS transmission dedicated cell to the mobile terminal provided with the MBMS service.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing the overall configuration of the mobile communication system according to the present invention. In FIG. 10, the mobile terminal 101 transmits and receives control data (C-plane) and user data (U-plane) to and from the base station 102. The base station 102 is a unicast cell 102-1 that handles only unicast transmission / reception, a mixed cell 102-2 that handles transmission / reception of unicast and MBMS services (MTCH and MCCH), and an MBMS dedicated cell 101- that handles only transmission / reception of MBMS services. It is classified into 3. The unicast cell 102-1 that handles unicast transmission / reception and the MBMS / unicast mixed cell (mixed cell, mixed cell) 102-2 are connected by the MME 103 and the interface S1_MME. Furthermore, the unicast cell 102-1 and the mixed cell 102-2 that handle unicast transmission / reception are connected to the S-GW 104 via an interface S1_U for transmission / reception of unicast user data. The MME 103 is connected to a PDNGW (Packet Data Network Gateway) 902 through an interface S11. The MCE 801 allocates radio resources to all base stations 102 in the MBSFN area in order to perform multi-cell (MC) transmission. For example, there is an MBSFN area # 1 composed of one or a plurality of MBMS / unicast mixed cells 102-2 and a MBSFN area # 2 composed of one or a plurality of MBMS dedicated cells 101-3. Think. The MBMS / unicast mixed cell 102-2 is connected to the MCE 801-1 that allocates radio resources for all base stations in the MBSFN area # 1 through the interface M2. The MBMS dedicated cell 102-3 is connected by an interface M2 to the MCE 801-2 that allocates radio resources for all base stations in the MBSFN area # 2.

  The MBMS GW 802 can be classified into MBMS CP 802-1 that handles control data and MBMS UP 802-2 that handles user data. The MBMS / unicast mixed cell 102-2 and the MBMS dedicated cell 102-3 are connected to the MBMS CP 802-1 at the interface M1 for transmission / reception of MBMS-related control data. The MBMS / unicast mixed cell 102-2 and the MBMS dedicated cell 102-3 are connected to the MBMS UP 802-2 at the interface M1_U for transmission / reception of MBMS-related user data. The MCE 801 is connected to the MBMS CP 802-1 at the interface M3 for transmission / reception of MBMS-related control data. The MBMS UP 802-2 is connected to the eBMSC 901 through the interface SGimb. The MBMS GW 802 is connected to the eBMSC 901 through the interface SGmb. The eBMSC 901 is connected to a content provider. The eBMSC 901 is connected to the PDN GW 902 through an interface SGi. The MCE 801 is connected to the MME 103 via an MME-MCE interface (IF) which is a new interface.

  FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the mobile terminal 101 used in the present invention. In FIG. 11, the transmission processing of the mobile terminal 101 is executed as follows. First, control data from the protocol processing unit 1101 and user data from the application unit 1102 are stored in the transmission data buffer unit 1103. Data stored in the transmission data buffer unit 1103 is transferred to the encoder unit 1104 and subjected to encoding processing such as error correction. There may be data that is directly output from the transmission data buffer unit 1103 to the modulation unit 1105 without being encoded. The data encoded by the encoder unit 1104 is subjected to modulation processing by the modulation unit 1105. The modulated data is converted into a baseband signal, and then output to the frequency conversion unit 1106 where it is converted into a radio transmission frequency. Thereafter, a transmission signal is transmitted from the antenna 1107 to the base station 102. In addition, the reception process of the mobile terminal 101 is executed as follows. A radio signal from the base station 102 is received by the antenna 1107. The received signal is converted from a radio reception frequency to a baseband signal by the frequency converter 1106, and demodulated by the demodulator 1108. The demodulated data is transferred to the decoder unit 1109 and subjected to decoding processing such as error correction. Of the decoded data, control data is passed to the protocol processing unit 1101, and user data is passed to the application unit 1102. A series of processing of the mobile terminal is controlled by the control unit 1110. Therefore, although the control part 1110 is abbreviate | omitted in drawing, it is connected with each part (1101-1109).

  FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the base station 102. The transmission process of the base station 102 is executed as follows. The EPC communication unit 1201 transmits and receives data between the base station 102 and the EPC (MME 103 and S-GW 104). The other base station communication unit 1202 transmits / receives data to / from other base stations. The EPC communication unit 1201 and the other base station communication unit 1202 exchange information with the protocol processing unit 1203, respectively. Control data from the protocol processing unit 1203 and user data and control data from the EPC communication unit 1201 and the other base station communication unit 1202 are stored in the transmission data buffer unit 1204. The data stored in the transmission data buffer unit 1204 is transferred to the encoder unit 1205 and subjected to encoding processing such as error correction. There may exist data that is directly output from the transmission data buffer unit 1204 to the modulation unit 1206 without being encoded. The encoded data is subjected to modulation processing by the modulation unit 1206. The modulated data is converted into a baseband signal, and then output to the frequency conversion unit 1207 to be converted into a radio transmission frequency. Thereafter, a transmission signal is transmitted from the antenna 1208 to one or a plurality of mobile terminals 101. Further, the reception process of the base station 102 is executed as follows. Radio signals from one or a plurality of mobile terminals 101 are received by the antenna 1208. The received signal is converted from a radio reception frequency to a baseband signal by the frequency converter 1207, and demodulated by the demodulator 1209. The demodulated data is transferred to the decoder unit 1210 and subjected to decoding processing such as error correction. Of the decoded data, the control data is passed to the protocol processing unit 1203 or the EPC communication unit 1201 and the other base station communication unit 1202, and the user data is passed to the EPC communication unit 1201 and the other base station communication unit 1202. A series of processing of the base station 102 is controlled by the control unit 1211. Therefore, the control unit 1211 is connected to each unit (1201 to 1210), which is omitted in the drawing.

  FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing a configuration of MME (Mobility Management Entity). A PDN GW communication unit 1301 transmits and receives data between the MME 103 and the PDN GW 902. The base station communication unit 1302 transmits and receives data between the MME 103 and the base station 102 using the S1_MME interface. When the data received from the PDN GW 902 is user data, the user data is passed from the PDN GW communication unit 1301 to the base station communication unit 1302 via the user plane processing unit 1303 and transmitted to one or a plurality of base stations 102. The When the data received from the base station 102 is user data, the user data is transferred from the base station communication unit 1302 to the PDN GW communication unit 1301 via the user plane processing unit 1303 and transmitted to the PDN GW 902.

  The MCE communication unit 1304 transmits and receives data between the MME 103 and the MCE 801 using the MME-MCE IF. When the data received from the PDN GW 902 is control data, the control data is transferred from the PDN GW communication unit 1301 to the control plane control unit 1305. When the data received from the base station 102 is control data, the control data is transferred from the base station communication unit 1302 to the control plane control unit 1305. The control data received from the MCE 801 is transferred from the MCE communication unit 1304 to the control plane control unit 1305. The result of the processing in the control plane control unit 1305 is transmitted to the PDN GW 902 via the PDN GW communication unit 1301, transmitted to one or a plurality of base stations 102 via the S1_MME interface via the base station communication unit 1302, and MCE. The data is transmitted to one or a plurality of MCEs 801 by the MME-MCE IF via the communication unit 1304. The control plane control unit 1305 includes a NAS security unit 1305-1, an SAE bearer control unit 1305-2, an idle state mobility management unit 1305-3, and the like, and performs overall processing for the control plane. The NAS security unit 1305-1 performs security of a NAS (Non-Access Stratum) message. The SAE bearer control unit 1305-2 manages the SAE (System Architecture Evolution) bearer. The idle state mobility management unit 1305-3 performs mobility management in a standby state (LTE-IDLE state, also simply referred to as idle), generation and control of a paging signal in the standby state, and one or more mobile terminals 101 being served thereby Add, delete, update, search, tracking area list (TA List) management, etc. The MME initiates a paging protocol by sending a paging message to a cell belonging to a tracking area (tracking area: TA) where the UE is registered. A series of processing of the MME 103 is controlled by the control unit 1306. Therefore, the control unit 1306 is connected to each unit (1301 to 1305), which is omitted in the drawing.

  FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing the configuration of MCE (Multi-cell / multicast Coordination Entity). The MBMS GW communication unit 1401 transmits and receives control data between the MCE 801 and the MBMS GW 802 using the M3 interface. The base station communication unit 1402 transmits and receives control data between the MCE 801 and the base station 102 using the M2 interface. The MME communication unit 1403 transmits and receives control data between the MCE 801 and the MME 103 by the MME-MCE IF. The MC transmission scheduler unit 1404 includes control data from the MBMS GW 802 passed through the MBMS GW communication unit 1401 and base stations in an MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network) area passed through the base station communication unit 1402 The control data from 102 and the control data from the MME 103 passed via the MME communication unit 1403 are used to schedule multi-cell transmission in one or more MBSFN areas managed by the mobile terminal. Examples of scheduling include base station radio resources (time, frequency, etc.), radio structure (modulation scheme, code, etc.), and the like. The scheduling result of multi-cell transmission is passed to the base station communication unit 1402 and transmitted to one or a plurality of base stations 102 in the MBSFN area. A series of processing of the MCE 801 is controlled by the control unit 1405. Therefore, the control unit 1405 is connected to each unit (1401 to 1404), which is omitted in the drawing.

  FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the MBMS gateway. In FIG. 15, an eBMSC communication unit 1501 of the MBMS GW 802 transmits and receives data (user data and control data) between the MBMS GW 802 and the eBMSC 901. The MCE communication unit 1502 transmits and receives control data between the MBMS GW 802 and the MCE 801 using the M3 interface. Control data received from the eBMSC 901 is transmitted to the MBMS CP unit 1503 via the eBMSC communication unit 1501, and after being processed by the MBMS CP unit 1503, is transmitted to one or a plurality of MCEs 801 via the MCE communication unit 1502. The control data received from the MCE 801 is transferred to the MBMS CP unit 1503 via the MCE communication unit 1502, and after being processed by the MBMS CP unit 1503, transmitted to the eBMSC 901 and / or the MCE 801 via the eBMSC communication unit 1501. The base station communication unit 1504 transmits user data (also referred to as traffic data) using the M1_U interface to the MBMS GW 802 and one or a plurality of base stations. User data received from the eBMSC 901 is transmitted to the MBMS UP unit 1505 via the eBMSC communication unit 1501, and after being processed by the MBMS UP unit 1505, transmitted to one or a plurality of base stations 102 via the base station communication unit 1504. The The MBMS CP unit 1503 and the MBMS UP unit 1505 are connected. A series of processing of the MBMS GW 802 is controlled by the control unit 1506. Therefore, the control unit 1506 is connected to each unit (1501 to 1506) although not shown in the drawing.

  Next, FIG. 16 shows an example of the flow of processing as a mobile communication system according to the present invention. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an outline of processing from the start of use of MBMS to the end of use by the mobile terminal in the LTE communication system. In step ST1601 of FIG. 16, the mobile terminal performs cell selection of the serving cell in the MBMS / unicast mixed cell. Hereinafter, the processing of step 1601 is referred to as “unicast side cell selection”. In step ST1601-1, the network side performs a “notice about receivable MBMS” process for the mobile terminal. Specifically, the mobile terminal is notified from the network side that there is an MBMS service that is currently available and information about the frequency (a list of frequencies). Since the mobile terminal can know that there is an available MBMS service and its frequency by the processing of ST1601-1, it is not necessary to search for a receivable frequency in a brute force manner. This has the effect of shortening the control delay until the mobile terminal receives a service from a frequency other than the current frequency.

  In step ST1602, the mobile terminal performs an MBMS transmission dedicated cell search process based on the information notified from the network side in step ST1601. Specific examples of the search process include timing synchronization (synchronization by radio frame timing), system bandwidth, number of transmission antennas, MBSFN area identifier (ID) (also referred to as MBSFN area number), MCCH (multicast control channel). System information such as related information is acquired. Hereinafter, the processing in step 1602 is referred to as “MBMS search”. In Step ST1603, the mobile terminal receives information for receiving the MBMS service (MCCH and MTCH) in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell from the network side. Hereinafter, the processing in step 1603 is referred to as “MBMS Area information acquisition”. In step ST1604, the user (mobile terminal) selects the MBMS service desired by the user using the information for receiving the MBMS service received from the network side in step ST1603. Hereinafter, the processing in step 1604 is referred to as “MBMS service selection”.

  As described above as the “fourth problem”, in the LTE communication system, a simple system is provided by providing only a downlink for transmitting broadcast data provided by the MBMS service to a mobile terminal and omitting the uplink. It has been studied to provide a cell dedicated to MBMS transmission to realize the configuration. Steps 1601-1 to ST1604 in the above description disclosed a method until the MBMS service by the MBMS transmission dedicated cell is selected. By the series of processes described above, the mobile terminal can receive a desired MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell.

  In step ST1605, the mobile terminal makes preparations for intermittently receiving MBMS data from the MBMS transmission dedicated cell using the information for receiving the MBMS service received from the network side in step ST1603. Hereinafter, the processing in step 1605 is referred to as “preparation for intermittent reception during MBMS reception”. In Step ST1606, the mobile terminal performs “MBMS side reception status notification” processing for notifying the network side of the MBMS reception status in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell. Since the MBMS transmission dedicated cell is not provided with an uplink, a mobile terminal receiving MBMS data in the MBMS dedicated cell cannot perform location registration on the network side. In this case, since the network side cannot identify the cell in which the mobile terminal exists, it is difficult to send a paging signal when an incoming call directed to the mobile terminal occurs. By this step ST1606, the network side can know that the mobile terminal is receiving the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell and can track the mobile terminal. When an incoming call occurs for a mobile terminal that is using the service, the paging information is transferred to the MBMS transmission dedicated cell via the MME 103 and the MCE 801-1 to notify the mobile terminal that is using the MBMS service that the individual incoming call has occurred. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to solve the first problem related to paging for mobile terminals that are using the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell.

  In Step ST1607, the mobile terminal performs measurement (measurement) processing including electrolytic strength measurement and cell selection of the unicast cell (FIG. 10 102-1) or / and the MBMS / unicast mixed cell (FIG. 10 102-2). . This process is referred to as “Unicast side measurement”. In step ST1607, even if the mobile terminal is receiving MBMS data in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell, the mobile terminal can measure the unicast cell (FIG. 10 102-1) or the MBMS / unicast mixed cell (FIG. 10 102-2). Processing such as selection and location registration can be performed. By performing this measurement process, the mobile terminal using the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell selects and updates the unicast cell or MBMS / unicast mixed cell to be transmitted, so that the uplink It is possible to secure mobility in an MBMS dedicated cell that does not exist. For this reason, a mobile terminal using an MBMS service in an MBMS dedicated cell can reliably perform a process related to mobility such as location registration via, for example, a unicast cell or an MBMS / unicast mixed cell. The network side can send a paging signal to the mobile terminal using the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell. Further, the mobile terminal establishes downlink synchronization through measurement with a unicast / mixed frequency layer according to a measurement cycle. Thereby, even in the case where the mobile terminal transmits a response to the paging signal via the MBMS / unicast mixed cell in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell in which no uplink exists, which is the second problem of the present invention, the control is performed. The delay can be reduced.

  In Step ST1608, the mobile terminal performs intermittent reception to receive a paging signal. More specifically, when an individual incoming call addressed to the mobile terminal occurs, the network side receives the MBMS service from the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer configured by the MBMS transmission dedicated cell. The paging signal is transmitted through the downlink of the MBMS transmission dedicated cell. In steps ST1605 to ST1608, it becomes possible to notify paging to the mobile terminal that is using the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell, which is the first problem of the present invention.

  The mobile terminal that has not received the paging signal in the “intermittent reception during MBMS reception” in step ST1608 receives the MBMS traffic data transmitted from the MBMS transmission dedicated cell via the multicast traffic channel (MTCH) in step ST1609. . Hereinafter, the process of step ST1608 is referred to as “MTCH reception”. The mobile terminal performing “MTCH reception” moves to step ST1607 at the timing of “Unicast side measurement”. Alternatively, the mobile terminal performing “MTCH reception” moves to step ST1602, or step ST1604, or step ST1612 when the reception sensitivity deteriorates. On the other hand, in step ST1610, the mobile terminal that has received the paging signal in the “intermittent reception during MBMS reception” in step ST1608 determines the frequency in the unicast / mixed frequency layer from the frequency in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer (f (MBMS)). The frequency is changed to (f (Unicast)), and control data is transmitted and received. Hereinafter, the process of step ST1610 is referred to as “Unicast side intermittent reception”. As a result, the mobile terminal can transmit uplink data such as a response to the paging signal to the network side via the unicast cell or the mixed cell. In Step ST1611, Step ST1612, the mobile terminal notifies the network side that the reception of MBMS data in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer (MBMS transmission dedicated cell) is terminated. Through step ST1611, the network side can know that the mobile terminal has finished using the MBMS service. A paging signal may be transmitted via a unicast cell or a mixed cell to a mobile terminal that has finished using the MBMS service by the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer, so that the network side performs paging via the downlink of the MBMS transmission cell. The process of notifying the signal can be stopped, and the radio resources of the MBMS transmission dedicated cell are effectively used.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
In the present embodiment, a detailed specific example of the processing flow of the mobile communication system described in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart for explaining cell selection on the unicast side. In step ST1701, a unicast cell, an MBMS / unicast mixed cell (also simply referred to as a mixed cell) is a first synchronization channel (Primary Synchronization Channel: P-SCH) and a second synchronization channel (Secondary Synchronization Channel: S-SCH) and a reference signal (also referred to as reference symbol: Reference Symbol: RS) are broadcast to the mobile terminals being served thereby. In Step ST1702, the mobile terminal receives P-SCH, S-SCH, and RS from the base station (unicast cell or / and mixed cell). In Step ST1703, the mobile terminal performs an initial cell search operation using the received P-SCH, S-SCH, and RS. Details of the cell search operation currently being discussed in 3GPP will be described. As a first step, the mobile terminal performs blind detection of a first synchronization channel (P-SCH) in which three types of defined sequences exist as a mobile communication system. The P-SCH is mapped to the center 72 subcarriers of the system bandwidth as a frequency and first (# 0) and sixth (# 5) for each radio frame in terms of time. Therefore, the mobile terminal that has detected the P-SCH blindly can detect the 5 ms timing and know the cell group (1 to 3 groups corresponding to the previous P-SCH 3-week sequence). As a second stage, the mobile terminal performs blind detection on the second synchronization channel (S-SCH). The mapping position of S-SCH is the same as that of P-SCH. A mobile terminal that blindly detects S-SCH can detect 10 ms timing detection (frame synchronization) and a cell identifier (Cell ID).

  In step ST1704, the mobile terminal performs cell selection. Cell selection is a process of selecting one base station that satisfies a condition that can be a serving base station (cell) by using a measurement result of a mobile terminal measuring downlink reception sensitivities from a plurality of base stations. Specific examples of conditions that can serve as a serving base station include those having the best reception sensitivity among downlink reception sensitivities from a plurality of base stations, or base stations that have exceeded the minimum threshold of reception sensitivity of the serving base station. It is done. Values actually measured by the mobile terminal include reference symbol received power (RSRP), E-UTRA carrier received signal strength indicator (RSSI), and the like. A serving base station is a base station that is responsible for scheduling of the mobile terminal. Even a base station other than the serving base station of the mobile terminal can be a serving base station for other mobile terminals. That is, all base stations of a unicast cell or a mixed MBMS / unicast cell have a scheduling function and can serve as a serving base station for any mobile terminal. In Step ST1705, the unicast cell and the MBMS / unicast mixed cell transmit broadcast information using a broadcast control channel (BCCH) that is one of logical channels. Specific examples of the broadcast information include a measurement cycle, an intermittent reception cycle, tracking area information (TA information), and the like. The measurement period is a period notified from the network side to a mobile terminal being served by the network, and the mobile terminal measures the electric field strength and the like according to this period. The intermittent reception period is a period for periodically monitoring the paging signal so that the mobile terminal receives the paging signal in the idle state. TA information is information relating to a “Tracking Area”. The MME starts the paging process by sending a paging message to each eNB belonging to the tracking area in which the UE is registered (TS36.300 19.2.2.1). In Step ST1706, the mobile terminal receives a measurement cycle, an intermittent reception cycle, TA information, and the like from the serving base station via the BCCH.

  In Step ST1707, the unicast cell and the MBMS / unicast mixed cell use BCCH to the mobile terminal, the frequency of the available MBMS service, that is, the frequency of the receivable MBSFN synchronization area (MBSFN Synchronization Area) (f (Referred to as “MBMS”). In the W-CDMA communication system, there is a parameter called preferred frequency information (PL information). The PL information is mapped to a multicast control channel (MCCH), which is a logical channel, on the network side, and is broadcast to the mobile terminals being served thereby. However, in the LTE system, it is planned to provide a unicast cell that does not provide an MBMS service. In such a unicast cell, a method of broadcasting f (MBMS) using MCCH, which is an MBMS channel, is adopted. There is a problem that you can not.

  In Step ST1708, the mobile terminal receives f (MBMS) transmitted from the serving base station using BCCH. When the mobile terminal receives f (MBMS), it is not necessary for the mobile terminal to comprehensively search for frequencies that may have a service other than the current frequency. This has the effect of shortening the control delay until the mobile terminal receives a service from a frequency other than the current frequency. Step ST1707 and step ST1708 are detailed specific examples of the “notification regarding receivable MBMS” described in the first embodiment. Here, if f (MBMS) is determined to be static (Static) or quasi-static (Semi-Static) as the mobile communication system, the mobile terminal does not broadcast f (MBMS) from the base station. The effect that the control delay until the service is received from the frequency other than the current frequency can be obtained. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to report f (MBMS), the effect of effective use of radio resources can also be obtained.

  On the other hand, in step ST1707 and step ST1708, in addition to f (MBMS), the system bandwidth and the number of transmission antennas in each f (MBMS) can be reported from the base station using BCCH. As a result, in step ST1708, the mobile terminal receives f (MBMS) transmitted from the serving base station using BCCH, thereby enabling system information (system bandwidth, transmission antenna) in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an effect that the control delay can be shortened. Because it is necessary to receive BCCH from the serving base station in the unicast / frequency layer in order to receive f (MBMS), even if the information (system bandwidth, number of transmission antennas) increases, the processing of the mobile terminal The time should not be so long. On the other hand, in order to acquire the system information of the MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer after moving to the MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer, it is necessary to receive the BCCH in the MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer. Since decoding processing is necessary, a control delay occurs.

  In Step ST1709, the mobile terminal includes the TA information of the serving base station received in Step ST1706 in the current tracking area list (TA List) stored in the protocol processing unit 1101 or the control unit 1110. Check. If included, the process proceeds to step ST1720 in FIG. If not included, step ST1710 is executed. In Step ST1710, the mobile terminal notifies the serving base station of an “Attach Request”. As information included in the “attach request”, an identifier of a mobile terminal (IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity) or S-TMSI (S-Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity, S-TMSI) is simply referred to as Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity (TMSI). The serving base station that has received the “attach request” in step ST1711 sends the “attach request” to the MME (Mobility Management Entity) or HSS in step ST1712. In step ST1713, the MME receives an “attach request.” The idle state mobility management unit 1305-3 of the MME manages the tracking area list of each mobile terminal. MME is managing the mobile terminal It is confirmed whether or not the serving base station of the mobile terminal is included in the tracking area list, and if it is included, the process proceeds to step ST1716 of Fig. 18. If not included, step ST1715 is executed. Then, the idle state mobility management unit 1305-3 of the MME performs a process of adding (or updating) the TA information of the serving base station of the mobile terminal to the tracking area list managed by the mobile terminal in Step ST1716. The MME notifies the serving base station of “Attach Accept.” Information included in the “Attach Accept” includes a tracking area list, an identifier (S-TMSI, etc.) given to the mobile terminal, and the like. “Attach Accept” at ST1717 Received serving base station, the "attach accept" in step ST1718 notifies to the mobile terminal. The mobile terminal, in step ST1719 receives the "attach accept".

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the MBMS search process. Steps 1720 to 1725 in FIG. 18 are specific processing of “MBMS search” described in the first embodiment. In Step ST1720, the mobile terminal confirms whether or not the frequency of the MBSFN synchronization area that can be received in Step ST1708 (or the frequency of the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission) has been received. That is, it is confirmed whether at least one f (MBMS) has been received. If it does not exist, the process ends. If present, step ST1721 is executed. In Step ST1721, the mobile terminal confirms whether or not the user intends to receive the MBMS service at f (MBMS). As a specific example of confirmation, when the user has an intention to receive the MBMS service, an instruction is sent to the mobile terminal using the user interface, and the mobile terminal stores the user's intention in the protocol processing unit 1101. In step ST1721, the mobile terminal confirms whether or not it intends to receive the MBMS service stored in the protocol processing unit 1101. If there is no intention to receive the MBMS service, the process of step ST1721 is repeated. As a method of repeating, a method in which the mobile terminal makes a determination in step ST1721 at a fixed period, or a method in which step ST1721 or step ST1720 is performed when there is a notification of change of intention to receive the MBMS service from the user through the user interface. and so on. If there is an intention to receive the MBMS service, the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST1722. In Step ST1722, the mobile terminal changes the set frequency of the frequency conversion unit 1107 (synthesizer), and starts the MBMS search operation by changing the center frequency to f (MBMS). Changing the set frequency of the frequency conversion unit 1107 and changing the center frequency is referred to as re-tune. In Step ST1723, the MBMS dedicated cell is served by the first synchronization channel (Primary Synchronization Signal: P-SCH), the second synchronization channel (Secondary Synchronization Signal: S-SCH), the reference signal (RS (MBMS)), and BCCH. Informs the mobile terminal. In Step ST1724, the mobile terminal receives P-SCH, S-SCH, RS (MBMS), and BCCH (broadcast control channel) from the MBMS dedicated cell.

  In step ST1725, the mobile terminal performs an MBMS search operation. A search operation in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission currently being discussed in 3GPP will be described. A sequence used exclusively in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission is added to the P-SCH. Additional dedicated sequences shall be defined statically. As a first step, the mobile terminal blind-detects the P-SCH with an additional dedicated sequence. The P-SCH is mapped to the center 72 subcarriers of the system bandwidth in terms of frequency and to the first (# 0) and the sixth (# 5) in terms of time for each radio frame. Therefore, the mobile terminal that has detected P-SCH blindly can detect the timing for 5 ms. In addition, P-SCH is transmitted in multicell. As a second stage, the mobile terminal performs blind detection on the S-SCH. The mapping position of S-SCH is the same as that of P-SCH. A mobile terminal that blindly detects S-SCH can detect 10 ms timing detection (frame synchronization) and the MBSFN area ID. S-SCH is transmitted in multicell. The BCCH is received using the scrambling code associated with the MBSFN area ID obtained in the second stage. The mobile terminal can obtain MCCH (multicast control channel) scheduling by decoding BCCH. This decoding process uses a scrambling code associated with the MBSFN area ID. BCCH is transmitted in multicell. In the present invention, it is assumed that the system bandwidth in f (MBMS) and the number of transmission antennas in f (MBMS) can be obtained by further decoding BCCH. Here, if the system bandwidth and the number of transmission antennas in f (MBMS) as a mobile communication system are determined to be static (Static) or quasi-static (Semi-Static), the base station uses f (MBMS). There is no need to report the system bandwidth or / and the number of transmission antennas, and the effect of effective use of radio resources can be obtained. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to decode and change the parameters (system bandwidth in f (MBMS) or / and the number of transmission antennas), it is possible to obtain the effects of reducing the power consumption of the mobile terminal and reducing the control delay.

  In the present invention, the MCCH scheduling is further considered. In the current 3GPP standard, an MBSFN synchronization area (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network Synchronization Area (MBMS)) can support one or more MBSFN areas (see FIG. 7). . On the other hand, how to multiplex a plurality of MBSFN areas at one frequency (Single Frequency) f (MBMS) has not been determined. Here, the “MBMS search” processing will be described for each multiplexing method so that the present invention can be applied even when the MBSFN area multiplexing method is different.

  First, a case where the MBSFN area is time division multiplexed (TDM) will be described. FIG. 25 shows a conceptual diagram of the geographical location of the base station when a plurality of MBSFN areas exist. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram showing a plurality of MBSFN areas constituting the MBSFN synchronization area. In FIG. 25, there are three areas, MBSFN area 1, MBSFN area 2, and MBSFN area 3, in one MBSFN synchronization area. A specific example of scheduling of MCCH in BCCH obtained in step ST1725 is not discussed in detail in the current 3GPP. In the present invention, in order to disclose a method for selecting a desired service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, which is a fourth problem, and a mobile communication system therefor, a case where the MBSFN area is time-division multiplexed. A specific example of scheduling of MCCH in BCCH will be described. FIG. 26 is a conceptual diagram of mapping of the MBSFN synchronization area to the physical channel when the MBSFN area is time-division multiplexed.

  FIG. 26 shows a concept in which channels to a plurality of MBMFN areas are time-division multiplexed in one MBSFN synchronization area. Since each MBFSN area included in one MBSFN synchronization area is temporally synchronized, the P-SCH (first synchronization channel) is an MBMS dedicated cell in the MBSFN area 1, an MBMS dedicated cell in the MBSFN area 2, and an MBSFN. The MBMS dedicated cell in area 3 is also transmitted at the same timing. If an additional dedicated sequence is used, the P-SCH sequences in all MBSFN areas are the same. Therefore, the same information is transmitted at the same timing in the MBSFN synchronization area using P-SCH. Further, as described above, it is considered that the MBSFN area ID is transmitted by S-SCH (second synchronization channel). In that case, different information for each MBSFN area is transmitted on the S-SCH at the same timing in the MBSFN synchronization area. In this case, the same information is transmitted at the same timing from all the MBMS dedicated cells in each MBSFN area. The mobile communication system multiplies the scrambling code associated with the MBSFN area ID when performing transmission using BCCH. This scrambling code is notified to the mobile terminal using S-SCH (second synchronization channel). Therefore, different information for each MBSFN area is transmitted at the same timing in the MBSFN synchronization area using BCCH. On the other hand, the content of BCCH is the same in all MBMS dedicated base stations in the MBSFN area. The mobile terminal can obtain MCCH scheduling by decoding BCCH.

  In the current 3GPP communication system, as described in Non-Patent Document 2, allocation of MBSFN subframes in an MBMS / unicast mixed cell is being studied. Since there is no unicast subframe in the MBMS dedicated cell provided in the LTE communication system, all are MBSFN subframes. However, it is important to match the configurations of the MBMS / unicast mixed cell and the MBMS dedicated cell as much as possible. Therefore, after following the concept of “MBSFN frame cluster” (MBSFN frame cluster) disclosed in Non-Patent Document 2, a method for scheduling an MBMS dedicated cell is disclosed. Furthermore, MCCH scheduling in the MBSFN subframe is also described. In FIG. 26, a cycle in which the MBSFN frame cluster is repeated is referred to as an MBSFN frame cluster repetition period (MBSFN frame Cluster Repetition Period). In addition, the cycle in which the MCCH is transmitted is referred to as an MCCH repetition period. A case where the MBSFN frame cluster is smaller than the MCCH repetition period will be described.

  In FIG. 26, it is assumed that the MCCH scheduling is notified of the starting point value of the time to which the MCCH is mapped and the MCCH repetition period. More specifically, a radio frame is used to specify the MCCH repetition period. SFN (System Frame Number) is used to specify the starting point value. Specific examples of the MCCH repetition period other than a radio frame may include a subframe. Other than SFN may be used to specify the starting point value. Specific examples include an offset value from some reference value. When the MCCH is mapped to some subframes in the radio frame, SFN, subframe number, etc. may be notified as a starting point. A specific calculation formula for obtaining the starting point value is represented by: starting point value = (first SFN number to which MCCH is mapped) mod (MCCH repetition period). In FIG. 26, the MCCH starting point value 1 of MBSFN area 1 is 1 mod 7 = 1 or 8 mod 7 = 1..., And the MCCH scheduling parameters of MBSFN area 1 are MCCH repetition period 1 “7”, starting point value 1 “1”. Further, the MCCH starting point value 2 of the MBSFN area 2 is 4 mod 7 = 4..., And the MCCH scheduling parameters of the MBSFN area 2 are the MCCH repetition period 2 “7” and the starting point value 2 “4”. The MCCH starting point value 3 of the MBSFN area 3 is 6 mod 7 = 6..., And the MCCH scheduling parameters of the MBSFN area 3 are the MCCH repetition period 3 “7” and the offset value 3 “6”. If the SFN at this time is mapped to the BCCH, it is broadcast for each radio frame, and is effective when receiving the MCCH from the MCCH starting point value.

  That is, data transmitted from the base station belonging to the MBSFN area 1 is as follows. The additional dedicated sequence P-SCH (first synchronization channel), S-SCH1 (second synchronization channel) mapped with MBSFN area ID1, etc., MCCH starting point value 1 “1”, MCCH repetition period 1 “ 7 ”and the like are mapped and BCCH1 to which scrambling code 1 is applied, MCCH1 and MTCH1 of MBSFN area 1 are transmitted. Since 3 from the base station belonging to the MBSFN area 1 are time-division multiplexed, MCCH 2 and 3 and MTCH 2 and 3 from the base stations belonging to the MBSFN area 2 and 3 are stopped during the transmission period of the MBSFN area 1 ( DTX: Discontinuous transmission. A scrambling code 1 may be applied to MCCH1 and MTCH2. By applying scrambling codes to MCCH1 and MTCH1, it is possible to obtain an effect that the processing for MBSFN area-specific data (BCCH, MCCH, MTCH) is unified. On the other hand, MCCH and MTCH are time division multiplexed (TDM), so that it is not necessary to apply a scrambling code specific to the MBSFN area. By not applying scrambling codes to MCCH1 and MTCH1, it is possible to reduce the load of encoding processing on the base station side and decoding processing on the mobile terminal side and to reduce delay until data reception.

  The data transmitted from the base stations belonging to the MBSFN area 2 as in the MBSFN area 1 are as follows. The additional dedicated sequences P-SCH (first synchronization channel), S-SCH2 (second synchronization channel) to which MBSFN area ID2 and the like are mapped, MCCH starting point value 2 “4”, MCCH repetition period 2 “ 7 "etc. are mapped and MCCH2 and MTCH2 of the base station belonging to the BCCH2 and MBSFN area 2 to which scrambling code 2 is applied are transmitted. During this period, MCCHs 1 and 3 and MTCHs 1 and 3 of the base stations belonging to the MBSFN areas 1 and 3 are suspended from transmission (DTX). The data transmitted from the base stations belonging to the MBSFN area 3 as in the MBSFN area 1 are as follows. The additional dedicated sequences P-SCH (first synchronization channel), S-SCH3 (second synchronization channel) to which MBSFN area ID3, etc. are mapped, MCCH starting point value 3 “6”, MCCH repetition period 3 “ 7 ”and the like are mapped and BCCH3 to which scrambling code 3 is applied, MCCH3 and MTCH3 in MBSFN area 3 are transmitted. During this period, MCCHs 1 and 2 and MTCHs 1 and 2 of the base stations belonging to MBSFN areas 1 and 2 are suspended (DTX). Although FIG. 26 shows an example in which MCCH and MTCH are time-divided in units of radio frames for convenience, even if the multiplexing method of MCCH and MTCH is another method, the unit of time-division multiplexing is not in units of radio frames. Even so, the present invention is applicable. In addition, if the MCCH repetition period is determined as static or semi-static as a mobile communication system, it is not necessary to report the MCCH repetition period from the base station. Since the information to be notified is reduced, the effect of effective use of radio resources can be obtained.

  Next, a case where the MBSFN area is code division multiplexed (CDM) will be described. The conceptual diagram of the location of the base station when there are a plurality of MBSFN areas is the same as in the case of time division multiplexing (TDM). FIG. 27 is a conceptual diagram of mapping of MBSFN synchronization areas to physical channels when MBSFN areas are code division multiplexed. In FIG. 27, it is assumed that MBMS services (MCCH, MTCH) are continuously transmitted in each MBSFN area. In such a case, the MBSFN frame cluster may not be defined. A case where the MBSFN frame cluster is smaller than the MCCH repetition period will be described. Since specific examples of P-SCH (first synchronization channel), S-SCH (second synchronization channel), and BCCH are the same as those in the case of time division multiplexing (TDM), description thereof is omitted. In the present invention, it is considered that the MCCH scheduling is notified of the starting point value of the time to which the MCCH is mapped and the MCCH repetition period. More specifically, the number of radio frames is used to specify the MCCH repetition period. SFN (System Frame Number) is used to specify the starting point value. Specific examples of the MCCH repetition period other than a radio frame may include a subframe. Other than SFN may be used to specify the starting point value. Specific examples include an offset value from some reference value. When the MCCH is mapped to some subframes in the radio frame, SFN, subframe number, etc. may be notified as a starting point. A specific calculation formula for obtaining the starting point value is represented by: starting point value = (first SFN number to which MCCH is mapped) mod (MCCH repetition period). In FIG. 27, the MCCH starting point value of the MBSFN area 1 is 1 mod 3 = 1, 4 mod 3 = 1..., And the MCCH scheduling parameters of the MBSFN area 1 are the MCCH repetition period 1 “3” and the starting point value “3”. 1 ”. The MCCH starting point value of the MBSFN area 2 is 1 mod 2 = 1, 3 mod 2 = 1..., And the MCCH scheduling parameters of the MBSFN area 1 are the MCCH repetition period 2 “2” and the starting point value “1”. The MCCH starting point value of the MBSFN area 3 is 2 mod 4 = 2.

  That is, data transmitted from the base station belonging to the MBSFN area 1 is as follows. P-SCH (first synchronization channel) which is a dedicated frequency layer sequence for MBMS transmission (the above-mentioned additional dedicated sequence), S-SCH1 (second synchronization channel) to which MBSFN area ID1 and the like are mapped, MCCH starting point Value 1 “1”, MCCH repetition period 1 “3”, etc. are mapped, and BCCH1 to which scrambling code 1 is applied, and MCCH1 and MTCH1 of the base station belonging to MBSFN area 1 to which scrambling code 1 is applied are transmitted. The The data transmitted from the base stations belonging to the MBSFN area 2 as in the MBSFN area 1 are as follows. P-SCH (first synchronization channel) which is a dedicated frequency layer sequence for MBMS transmission, S-SCH2 (second synchronization channel) to which MBSFN area ID2 and the like are mapped, MCCH starting point value 2 “1”, MCCH The repetition period 2 “2” or the like is mapped, and BCCH2 to which scrambling code 2 is applied, and MCCH2 and MTCH2 of the base station belonging to MBSFN area 2 to which scrambling code 2 is applied are transmitted. The data transmitted from the base stations belonging to the MBSFN area 3 as in the MBSFN area 1 are as follows. P-SCH (first synchronization channel), which is a frequency layer-dedicated sequence dedicated for MBMS transmission, S-SCH3 (second synchronization channel) to which MBSFN area ID3, etc. are mapped, MCCH starting point value 3 “2”, MCCH The repetition period 3 “4” or the like is mapped, and BCCH3 to which scrambling code 3 is applied, and MCCH3 and MTCH3 of the base station belonging to MBSFN area 3 to which scrambling code 3 is applied are transmitted.

  FIG. 27 shows an example in which MCCH and MTCH are time-divided in units of radio frames for convenience. However, even if the multiplexing method of MCCH and MTCH is different, the unit of time-division multiplexing is not in units of radio frames Even if it exists, this invention is applicable. In addition, if the MCCH repetition period is determined as static or semi-static as a mobile communication system, it is not necessary to report the MCCH repetition period from the base station. Since the information to be notified is reduced, the effect of effective use of radio resources can be obtained. When MBSFN areas are code division multiplexed (CDM), it is possible to set different repetition periods for each MBSFN area compared to when MBSFN areas are time division multiplexed (TDM). There is an effect that scheduling becomes possible. Further, by using code division multiplexing, the mobile terminal can be separated even if MTCH and MCCH from a plurality of MBSFN areas overlap at the same time (because it can be separated by a scrambling code). Therefore, since it becomes possible to transmit MTCH and MCCH from the MBSFN area 1-3 simultaneously as a mobile communication system, it is possible to obtain an effect of expanding the frequency and time radio resources allocated to one MBSFN area. I can do it.

  Next, in the current 3GPP discussion, it is considered to provide an MBSFN area that covers a plurality of MBSFN areas. FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram showing a plurality of MBSFN areas constituting an MBSFN synchronization area, and is an explanatory diagram showing an MBSFN area covering a plurality of MBSFN areas. In FIG. 28, MBSFN areas 1 to 4 exist in one MBSFN synchronization area. Among them, MBSFN area 4 covers MBSFN areas 1 to 3. Although it is discussed that the MBSFN area 4 is accessed via the covered MBSFN areas 1 to 3, details have not been determined. Therefore, an access method to an MBSFN area that covers a plurality of MBSFN areas will be described below.

  As described above, since the MBSFN area multiplexing method has not been determined in detail at present, first, the MBSFN area 4 and the MBSFN areas 1 to 3 covered by the MBSFN area 1 are time-division multiplexed, and A case where the covered MBSFN areas 1 to 3 are code division multiplexed will be described. A specific example of step ST1725 (see FIG. 18) in the case where the geographical location is the MBSFN area as shown in FIG. As a first step, the mobile terminal performs blind detection of the P-SCH (first synchronization channel) in the dedicated sequence. A mobile terminal that has blind-detected P-SCH can detect timing for 5 ms. P-SCH is multi-cell transmission. Base stations located in the MBSFN synchronization area are synchronized for multi-cell transmission. Therefore, multi-cell transmission of P-SCH is targeted for base stations included in the synchronization area. As a second stage, the mobile terminal performs blind detection of S-SCH (second synchronization channel). A mobile terminal that has blindly detected S-SCH can detect 10 ms timing detection (frame synchronization) and the MBSFN area ID. S-SCH is multi-cell transmission. The MBSFN area ID at this time is the covered MBSFN area ID. That is, each of the covered MBSFN area IDs (any of MBSFN areas 1 to 3) where the mobile terminal is located. Therefore, S-SCH multi-cell transmission is targeted for base stations included in each covered MBSFN area. The mobile terminal receives BCCH (broadcast control channel) using the scrambling code associated with the MBSFN area ID obtained in the second stage. By decoding BCCH, MCCH (multicast control channel) scheduling can be obtained. BCCH is multi-cell transmission. Since the scrambling code obtained in the second stage is used, the BCCH becomes the BCCH from the covered MBSFN area. Therefore, multi-cell transmission of BCCH is targeted for base stations included in each covered MBSFN area. The mobile terminal can obtain MCCH scheduling, system bandwidth in f (MBMS), the number of transmission antennas, and the like by decoding BCCH.

  Here, MCCH scheduling will be further examined. In FIG. 29, the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN area 4) and the covered MBSFN areas (MBSFN areas 1 to 3) are time division multiplexed, and the multiplexing method between the covered MBSFN areas is code division multiplexing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mapping to the physical channel of the MBSFN synchronous area in a case. Since the MBSFN synchronization area is synchronized in time, the P-SCH (first synchronization channel) is transmitted to the MBMS dedicated cells in the MBSFN areas 1 to 3 at the same timing. Further, if the sequence dedicated to the frequency layer dedicated to the MBMS transmission (the additional dedicated sequence) is used, the sequences of P-SCHs (second synchronization channels) in all MBSFN areas are the same. Therefore, the same information is transmitted at the same timing in the MBSFN synchronization area for the P-SCH. As described above, it is considered that the MBSFN area ID is transmitted by S-SCH (second synchronization channel). Therefore, in this case, S-SCH is transmitted with different information for each MBSFN area at the same timing in the MBSFN synchronization area. In this case, the same information is transmitted at the same timing from all the MBMS dedicated cells in each MBSFN area. At this time, it is assumed that there is no S-SCH peculiar to the covering MBSFN area (MBSFN area 4). S-SCH uses the same radio resources in terms of frequency and time in the MBSFN synchronization area. Since the S-SCH is used for searching for the MBSFN area ID associated with each MBSFN area scrambling code, the S-SCH cannot be subjected to the scrambling code of each MBSFN area. The transmission of the covered MBSFN area S-SCH means that a plurality of MBSFN areas overlap as geographical locations, but in the overlapping MBSFN areas (for example, MBSFN areas 1 and 4), S- Only one type of SCH needs to be transmitted. Thereby, it can prevent that S-SCH from a mutual MBSFN area becomes interference. The mobile communication system transmits a BCCH to which a scrambling code associated with an MBSFN area ID notified by S-SCH is applied. Therefore, in this case, the BCCH is transmitted at the same timing in the MBSFN synchronization area with different information for each covered MBSFN area. The contents of BCCH are the same in all MBMS dedicated base stations in the MBSFN area. The mobile terminal can obtain MCCH scheduling by decoding BCCH. The current 3GPP does not discuss specific examples of MCCH scheduling. The present invention shows a specific example of MCCH scheduling.

In FIG. 29, MCCH scheduling in the case where the MBSFN frame cluster is larger than the MCCH repetition period will be described together. Two stages are considered for MCCH scheduling in the covered MBSFN area. In the following description, for convenience, a case will be described in which the mobile terminal is located in the MBSFN area 1 as the MBSFN area covered and the MBSFN area 4 exists as the covered MBSFN area. As a first stage, MCCH scheduling of MBSFN area 1 is notified on BCCH of MBSFN area 1. The present invention shows a specific example of MCCH scheduling. In the present invention, it is considered to notify the starting point value of the time for mapping the MCCH, the MBSFN frame cluster repetition period, and the number of MCCH transmissions within the MBSFN frame cluster repetition period as MCCH scheduling. More specifically, the number of radio frames is used for the repetition period of the MBSFN frame cluster. More specifically, SFN (System Frame Number) is used to specify the starting point value. As a specific example, there is a subframe or the like other than the radio frame may be used for specifying the repetition period of the MBSFN frame cluster. Other than SFN may be used to specify the starting point value. Specific examples include an offset value from some reference value. When MCCH is mapped to some subframes in a radio frame, SFN and subframe number may be notified as a starting point. As a specific calculation formula for obtaining the starting point value, starting point value = (first SFN number to which MCCH is mapped) mod (MBSFN FRAME Cluster Repetition Period) can be considered. More specifically, the number of MCCH transmissions in the MBSFN frame cluster (hereinafter referred to as N _MCCH ) is used as the number of MCCH transmissions within the MBSFN frame cluster repetition period. A concrete computation expression for calculating the N _{MCCH is} expressed by N MCCH = MBSFN frame cluster / MCCH repetition period (MCCH Repetition Period). In FIG. 29, the MCCH offset value 1 of the MBSFN area 1 is 1 mod 10 = 1. The MCCH starting point value 2 of the MBSFN area 2 is 1 mod 10 = 1. The MCCH starting point value 4 of the MBSFN area 4 is 7 mod 10 = 7. Next, N _MCCH 1 of MBSFN area 1 is _6/2 = 3. Also, N _MCCH 2 of MBSFN area 2 is _6/3 = 2. N _MCCH 4 in the MBSFN area 4 is _4/2 = 2. Therefore, the MCCH scheduling parameters of MBSFN area 1 are MBSFN frame cluster repetition period 1 “10”, starting point value 1 “1”, and N _MCCH 1 “3”. At this time, instead of notifying N _MCCH 1 as a parameter, MBSFN frame cluster 1 and MCCH repetition period 1 may be notified.

As a second step, the MCCH scheduling of the MBSFN area 4 is notified on the MCCH of the MBSFN area 1. A specific example of MCCH scheduling is the MBSFN of the MBSFN area covered in addition to the parameters of the MBSFN area 4 (MBSFN frame cluster repetition period 4 “10”, state point 4 “7”, N _MCCH 4 “2”). The area ID (MBSFN area 4) is notified. As the MCCH scheduling of the MBSFN area 4, a single-stage case may be considered. That is, the MCCH scheduling of the MBSFN area 4 is also notified by the BCCH of the MBSFN area 1. As a result, the mobile terminal that receives the service in the MBSFN area 4 does not need to receive and decode the MCCH in the MBSFN area 1, so that the control delay can be reduced. As the MCCH scheduling, the above-mentioned starting point, MBSFN frame cluster repetition period, and N _MCCH (MBSFN frame cluster and MCCH repetition period may be used) are used in the case of MBSFN area time-division multiplexed (see FIG. 26) It can also be used when there are multiple MCCHs in the cluster.

That is, data transmitted from the base station belonging to the MBSFN area 1 is as follows. P-SCH (first synchronization channel) that is a frequency layer-dedicated sequence dedicated to MBMS transmission, S-SCH1 (second synchronization channel) to which MBSFN area ID1 and the like are mapped, MCCH starting point value 1 “1”, MBSFN Frame cluster repetition period 1 “10”, N _MCCH 1 “3”, and the like are mapped, and BCCH 1 to which scrambling code 1 is applied, and MCCH 1 and MTCH 1 of MBSFN area 1 to which scrambling code 1 is applied are transmitted. In MCCH1, the MBSFN area ID (MBSFN area 4) of the MBSFN area 4 and the MCCH scheduling of the MBSFN area 4, the MCCH starting point value 4 “7”, the MBSFN frame cluster repetition period 4 “10”, and the N _MCCH 4 “2” Is sent. The data transmitted from the base stations belonging to the MBSFN area 2 as in the MBSFN area 1 are as follows. S-SCH2, which is a sequence dedicated to the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, S-SCH2 to which MBSFN area ID2 and the like are mapped, MCCH starting point value 2 “1”, MBSFN frame cluster repetition period 2 “10”, N _MCCH 2 “2” or the like is mapped and BCCH2 to which scrambling code 2 is applied and MCCH2 and MTCH2 of MBSFN area 2 to which scrambling code 2 is applied are transmitted. In MCCH2, the MBSFN area ID (MBSFN area 4) of the MBSFN area 4 and the MCCH scheduling of the MBSFN area 4, the MCCH offset value 4 “7”, the MBSFN frame cluster repetition period 4 “10”, and the N _MCCH 4 “2” are transmitted. Is done.

  As data transmitted from the MBSFN area 4, there is no transmission of P-SCH and S-SCH as described above. Further, if there is no need to notify more than the information transmitted on the BCCH of the MBSFN area (MBSFN areas 1 to 3) covered as system information of the MBSFN area 4, transmission of BCCH from the MBSFN area 4 is omitted. I can do it. Thereby, the effect of effective utilization of radio resources can be obtained. MCCH4 and MTCH4 of MBSFN area 4 to which no scrambling code is applied are transmitted.

  Although FIG. 29 shows an example in which MCCH and MTCH are time-divided in units of radio frames for convenience, even if the multiplexing method of MCCH and MTCH is different, the unit of time-division multiplexing is not in units of radio frames. Even if it exists, this invention is applicable. A multiplexing method in which the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN area 4) and the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN areas 1 to 3) are time division multiplexed, and the covered MBSFN areas are code division multiplexed. Uses code division multiplexing as a multiplexing method for MBSFN areas 1 to 3 in which geographical locations are separated. Thereby, the advantage of effective use of frequency and time radio resources can be obtained. In code division multiplexing, each MBSFN area is separated only by a scrambling code assigned to each MBSFN area, and thus there is a possibility that data between the MBSFN areas interfere with each other. However, in this multiplexing method, there is an effect that interference due to mutual transmission data hardly occurs even if code division multiplexing is used in multiplexing of MBSFN areas 1 to 3 where geographical locations are separated. Time division multiplexing is used for multiplexing the MBSFN area 4 and the MBMSFN areas 1 to 3 whose geographical locations are not separated. Thereby, since it is not geographically separated, the multiplexing method of the MBSFN area 4 and the MBSFN areas 1 to 3 which are more likely to cause interference can be changed to a multiplexing method which hardly causes interference. With this multiplexing method, it is possible to obtain an effect that radio resources can be effectively used while suppressing interference between the MBSFN areas. Furthermore, P-SCH, S-SCH, and BCCH can be reduced by not performing MBMS search in the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN area 4). Thereby, the effect that the radio | wireless resource of the MBSFN area 4 can be used effectively can be acquired.

  Next, when the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN area 4) and the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN areas 1 to 3) are time division multiplexed, the multiplexing method between the covered MBSFN areas is also time division multiplexed. A specific example will be described. The conceptual diagram of the location of the base station when there are multiple MBSFN areas is covered by time-division multiplexing the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN area 4) and the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN areas 1 to 3). The multiplexing method between the MBSFN areas is the same as in the case of code division multiplexing. Since P-SCH, S-SCH, and BCCH are the same as those described above, description thereof is omitted. A specific example of MCCH scheduling will be described mainly with respect to different parts, which is almost the same as in the above case. As a first step, MCCH scheduling of MBSFN area 1 is notified on BCCH of MBSFN area 1. The present invention shows a specific example of MCCH scheduling. In the present invention, it is considered that the MCCH scheduling is notified of the starting point value of the time to which the MCCH is mapped and the MCCH repetition period. The number of radio frames is used to specify the MCCH repetition period. More specifically, SFN (System Frame Number) is used to specify the starting point value. A specific example of the MCCH repetition period other than the number of radio frames may be a subframe. Other than SFN may be used to specify the starting point value. Specific examples include an offset value from some reference value. When the MCCH is mapped to some subframes in the radio frame, SFN, subframe number, etc. may be notified as a starting point. A specific calculation formula for obtaining the starting point value is starting point value = (first SFN number to which MCCH is mapped) mod (MCCH repetition period). As a second step, the MCCH scheduling of the MBSFN area 4 is notified on the MCCH of the MBSFN area 1. A specific example of MCCH scheduling is to notify the MBSFN area ID (MBSFN area 4) of the covered MBSFN area in addition to the parameters of the MBSFN area 4 similar to the MBSFN area 1 described above. A description of the parameters of the MBSFN area 4 is omitted.

  Next, the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN area 4) and the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN areas 1 to 3) are code division multiplexed, and the multiplexing method between the covered MBSFN areas is also code division multiplexed. A specific example in the case will be described. The conceptual diagram of the location of the base station when there are multiple MBSFN areas is covered by time-division multiplexing the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN area 4) and the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN areas 1 to 3). The multiplexing method between the MBSFN areas is the same as in the case of code division multiplexing. Since P-SCH, S-SCH, and BCCH are the same as those described above, description thereof is omitted. A specific example of MCCH scheduling will be described mainly with respect to different parts, which is almost the same as in the above case. As a first step, MCCH scheduling of MBSFN area 1 is notified on BCCH of MBSFN area 1. The present invention shows a specific example of MCCH scheduling. In the present invention, it is considered that the MCCH scheduling is notified of the starting point value of the time to which the MCCH is mapped and the MCCH repetition period. The number of radio frames is used to specify the MCCH repetition period. More specifically, SFN (System Frame Number) is used to specify the starting point value. Other than the number of radio frames may be used to specify the MCCH repetition period. Specific examples include subframes. Other than SFN may be used to specify the starting point value. Specific examples include an offset value from some reference value. When the MCCH is mapped to some subframes in the radio frame, SFN, subframe number, etc. may be notified as a starting point. A specific calculation formula for obtaining the starting point value is starting point value = (first SFN number to which MCCH is mapped) mod (MCCH repetition period). As a second step, the MCCH scheduling of the MBSFN area 4 is notified on the MCCH of the MBSFN area 1. As a specific example of MCCH scheduling, the MBSFN area ID (MBSFN area 4) of the covered MBSFN area is notified in addition to the parameters of the MBSFN area 4 as in the MBSFN area 1 described above. A description of the parameters of the MBSFN area 4 is omitted. The scrambling code used in the MBSFN area 4 is determined based on the MBSFN area ID (MBSFN area 4) notified on the MCCH1 of the MBSFN area 1.

  Next, the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN area 4) and the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN areas 1 to 3) are code division multiplexed, and the multiplexing method between the covered MBSFN areas is time division multiplexing. A specific example in the case will be described. The conceptual diagram of the location of the base station when there are multiple MBSFN areas is covered by time-division multiplexing the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN area 4) and the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN areas 1 to 3). The multiplexing method between the MBSFN areas is the same as in the case of code division multiplexing. Since P-SCH, S-SCH, and BCCH are the same as those described above, description thereof is omitted. A specific example of MCCH scheduling will be described mainly with respect to different parts, which is almost the same as in the above case. As a first step, MCCH scheduling of MBSFN area 1 is notified on BCCH of MBSFN area 1. The present invention shows a specific example of MCCH scheduling. In the present invention, it is considered that the MCCH scheduling is notified of the starting point value of the time to which the MCCH is mapped and the MCCH repetition period. The number of radio frames is used to specify the MCCH repetition period. More specifically, SFN (System Frame Number) is used to specify the starting point value. Other than the number of radio frames may be used to specify the MCCH repetition period. Specific examples include subframes. Other than SFN may be used to specify the starting point value. Specific examples include an offset value from some reference value. When the MCCH is mapped to some subframes in the radio frame, SFN, subframe number, etc. may be notified as a starting point. A specific calculation formula for obtaining the starting point value is starting point value = (first SFN number to which MCCH is mapped) mod (MCCH repetition period). As a second step, the MCCH scheduling of the MBSFN area 4 is notified on the MCCH of the MBSFN area 1. As a specific example of MCCH scheduling, a specific example of MCCH scheduling is to notify the MBSFN area 4 parameters of the state point, MCCH repetition period, and the MBSFN area ID (MBSFN area 4) of the covered MBSFN area.

  The MCCH starting point may be an MCH starting point or a PMCH starting point in MCCH scheduling in all the multiplexing methods of the MBSFN area described above. In the case of the MCH starting point, the parameter MCCH repetition period in MCCH scheduling is the MCH repetition period. At that time, if MCCH is always mapped in each MCH, MCH repetition period = MCCH repetition period. On the other hand, when the MCCH is not necessarily mapped in each MCH, the MCCH repetition period may be included as a parameter together with the MCH repetition period. In the case of the PMCH starting point, the parameter MCCH repetition period in MCCH scheduling is the PMCH repetition period. At that time, when MCCH is always mapped in each PMCH, PMCH repetition period = MCCH repetition period. On the other hand, when the MCCH is not necessarily mapped in each PMCH, the MCCH repetition period may be included as a parameter together with the PMCH repetition period.

  Next, in 3GPP, discussions are progressing in a direction in which single cell transmission is supported in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. As a support method, a method of realizing single cell transmission in an MBSFN area having a single cell configuration is being discussed. However, there is no discussion about a specific implementation method. In the present invention, in order to disclose a method for selecting a desired service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, which is the fourth problem, and a mobile communication system therefor, a specific example of a single cell transmission support method is disclosed. Show. The specific implementation example in the case where there is an MBSFN area that covers a plurality of MBSFN areas has been described above. In the above method, the covered MBSFN areas (MBSFN Area 1 to 3) are replaced with cells that perform single-cell transmission, and the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN Area 4) is a cell that performs multi-cell transmission. By replacing with, single cell transmission can be realized in an MBSFN area having a single cell configuration.

  Next, “MBMS area information acquisition” described in the first embodiment will be described more specifically using steps ST1726 and 1727 in FIG. 18 and steps ST1728 and 1729 in FIG. The MCCH (multicast control channel) in each MBSFN area considers multi-cell transmission. Therefore, in step ST1726, the MCE transmits the contents of the MCCH and radio resource allocation for transmitting the MCCH to the base station in the MBSFN area. In Step ST1727, each MBMS dedicated base station receives the contents of the MCCH and assignment of radio resources for transmitting the MCCH from the MCE. In step ST1728, each base station transmits control information such as MBMS area information, discontinuous reception (DRX) information, and paging group number K using the MCCH in accordance with radio resources allocated from the MCE. In Step ST1729, the mobile terminal receives MCCH from each base station in the MBSFN area. MCCH reception uses the scheduling of MCCH received from the network side in step ST1725.

  A specific example of the reception method will be described. As a representative, a case will be described in which a plurality of base stations are arranged as shown in FIG. 25 and each MBSFN area is time-division multiplexed as shown in FIG. A case where the mobile terminal is located under the MBSFN area 1 will be described. By decoding BCCH1 (broadcast control channel) in MBSFN area 1, the mobile terminal receives MCCH1 scheduling parameters of starting point value 1 “1” and MCCH repetition period 1 (MCCH Repetiton Period) “7”. If SFN (System Frame Number) is mapped to BCCH, the mobile terminal can know the SFN number by decoding BCCH. The mobile terminal can obtain the SFN number to which the MCCH is mapped by the following formula. SFN = MCCH repetition period 1 × α + starting point value 1 (α is a positive integer). The mobile terminal can receive MCCH1 by receiving and decoding the radio resource of the SFN number to which MCCH1 is mapped. Control information for MBMS service transmitted in multicell from MBSFN area 1 is mapped to MCCH1. Specific examples of the control information include MBMS area information, DRX information, MBMS reception time missing reception parameters, and the like.

  A specific example of MBMS area information will be described with reference to FIG. As the MBMS area information, the frame configuration of each area (MBSFN frame cluster, MBSFN subframe, etc.), service content, MTCH modulation information, and the like can be considered. As the MBSFN frame cluster 1, the number of frames in the set of frames allocated to the MBSFN area 1 within the 1 MBSFN frame cluster repetition period is notified. As MBSFN subframe 1, a subframe number in which MBMS data (MTCH or / and MCCH) is actually mapped in one radio frame in MBSFN frame cluster 1 is notified. In providing an MBMS service using an MBMS dedicated base station, unlike an MBMS / unicast mixed cell, it is not necessary to share radio resources with unicast data. Therefore, MBMS data can be mapped to all subframes in one radio frame (except for the P-SCH, S-SCH, and BCCH mapping portions). When mapping MBMS data to all subframes, it is not necessary to notify the MBSFN subframe parameters from the network side to the mobile terminal side. Thereby, effective utilization of radio resources can be achieved. Alternatively, when MBMS data is statically transmitted from an MBMS dedicated cell as a wireless communication system, it is possible to transmit a large amount of MBMS data by mapping the MBMS data to all subframes. Since it is not necessary to notify the parameter of the MBSFN subframe, it is possible to further effectively use radio resources. As the service contents, the service contents performed in the MBMS area 1 are notified. When a plurality of services (movies and sports broadcasts, etc.) are performed in the MBSFN area 1, a plurality of service contents and their multiple parameters are notified.

  FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a relationship between a DRX period in which transmission of MBMS data to a mobile terminal is stopped and reception of MBMS data at the mobile terminal is stopped, and a DRX period in which the DRX period is repeated. . A specific example of DRX (Discontinuous reception) information will be described with reference to FIG. In order to notify the mobile terminal that uses the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell, which is the first problem of the present invention, the mobile terminal that is receiving the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell is unidirectional. It is necessary to perform location registration in the network through a cast cell or a mixed MBMS / unicast cell. For this purpose, measurement and location registration (cell re-selection of a serving base station) of a unicast cell or a mixed MBMS / unicast cell is required. Thereby, the effect that it becomes possible to ensure the mobility in a MBMS exclusive cell without an uplink via a unicast / mixed cell can be acquired. For this reason, it is possible to receive a paging signal even in a mobile terminal receiving an MBMS service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. Therefore, even a mobile terminal that is receiving an MBMS service in an MBMS transmission dedicated cell needs to perform measurement of a unicast cell and an MBMS / unicast mixed cell at a constant period. In the conventional method (3GPP W-CDMA), the measurement period is an integral multiple of the intermittent reception period, and is notified to the mobile terminal by the upper layer from the network side.

  Here, the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell applies the measurement in the measurement cycle notified from the upper layer of the unicast cell and the MBMS / unicast mixed cell by applying the conventional method. If so, the base station constituting the MBMSFN synchronization area of the MBMSFN dedicated frequency cell and the base station constituting the unicast / mixed frequency layer are not synchronized (asynchronous) with each other. Therefore, there is a problem that the MBMS reception must be interrupted in order to perform the above.

  Therefore, in the present invention, as a solution to the above problem, one DRX period is provided in the MBSFN synchronization area (see FIG. 30). In the first embodiment, the DRX period is a period in which transmission of MBMS data from the network side to the mobile terminal is stopped for the MBMS service in all MBSFN areas in the MBSFN synchronization area, that is, the MBMS data is viewed from the mobile terminal side. It means a period when no reception is performed. The mobile terminal using the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer uses the MBMS service by measuring the unicast cell and the MBMS / unicast mixed cell during the DRX period in which MBMS data is not transmitted from the network side. The effect of eliminating the need to interrupt is obtained. Further, by providing the DRX period in the MBSFN synchronization area, the mobile terminal can simultaneously receive MBMS data from the MBSFN area in the MBSFN synchronization area without adding any control.

  Next, the DRX cycle shown in FIG. 30 will be described. The DRX cycle is a cycle in which the DRX period described above is repeated. In the conventional method, the measurement cycle is set (notified) from the network side to the mobile terminal. If this method is followed also in LTE, if a mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer performs measurement in the unicast / mixed frequency layer in the DRX period, the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency is used. It is necessary to notify the control device (base station, MME, PDNGW, etc.) on the unicast cell, MBMS / unicast mixed cell side through any route of the DRX cycle and DRX period information of the layer. Furthermore, since the base stations constituting the unicast / mixed frequency layer are basically configured asynchronously, the DRX cycle and DRX period of the MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer are set to each unicast cell or each MBMS / unicast. It becomes necessary to notify the mixed cell. This method complicates the mobile communication system and is not preferable. Therefore, the present invention discloses the following method. The DRX cycle in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell is the minimum value of the measurement cycle that can be taken by the unicast cell or the unicast / mixed frequency cell or a divisor of the minimum value. A measurement cycle that can be set for a mobile terminal that is receiving an MBMS service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission in a unicast cell or an MBMS / unicast mixed cell is a measurement cycle that can be taken in the unicast / mixed frequency layer If they are different, the DRX cycle is approximately the measurement cycle that can be set for the mobile terminal that is receiving the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, or the minimum value of the measurement cycle, or the minimum value of the measurement cycle. It is a number. Thereby, no matter what measurement cycle is notified (set) to the mobile terminal in the unicast cell, MBMS / unicast mixed cell, in the DRX period provided in the DRX cycle in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, If the unicast / mixed frequency layer measurement is performed, the measurement cycle notified from the network side can be satisfied. By adopting this method, the MBMS transmission dedicated cell is controlled from the MBMS transmission dedicated cell control device (base station, MCE, MBMS gateway, eBNSC, etc.) to the unicast cell, MBMS / unicast mixed cell control device. There is no need to notify the DRX cycle or DRX period. Therefore, the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the MBSFN transmission dedicated frequency layer interrupts the reception of the MBMS service while preventing the mobile communication system from becoming complicated, that is, avoiding additional signaling on the radio interface or in the network. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an effect that the measurement can be executed in the measurement cycle notified (set) by the unicast cell or the MBMS / unicast mixed cell to the mobile terminal. Also, broadcast information may be acquired from the serving cell of the unicast / mixed frequency layer in the DRX period, and for example, it is possible to cope with a case where the broadcast information in the serving cell is modified.

  A specific parameter example of the DRX information will be described with reference to FIG. Specifically, DRX information parameters may include a DRX period, a DRX cycle, and a starting point value (DRX). Specifically, the number of radio frames is used to specify the DRX period and the DRX cycle. In FIG. 30, the DRX period is “4” radio frames (a period between SFN4 and SFN7). The DRX cycle is “7” radio frames (periods from SFN4 to SFN10). Further, SFN is used to specify the starting point value (DRX) at which the DRX period starts. Specific examples of the DRX period and DRX cycle other than the number of radio frames may include subframes. Other than SFN may be used to specify the starting point value. Specific examples include an offset value from some reference value. When the MCCH is mapped to some subframes in the radio frame, SFN, subframe number, etc. may be notified as a starting point. A specific calculation formula for obtaining the starting point value (DRX) is the starting point value (DRX) = (first SFN number at which the DRX period starts) mod (DRX cycle). In FIG. 30, the starting point value (DRX) is 4 mod 7 = 4 or 11 mod 7 = 4. Here, an example is shown in which SFN is used to specify the starting point value (DRX). Here, an example in which one DRX period is provided in the MBSFN synchronization area has been described. Therefore, the starting point value (DRX) is also common to the base stations in the MBSFN synchronization area. Consider a case where SFN is used as a starting point value (DRX). Assume that the same number is transmitted from the base station in the MBSFN synchronization area at the same timing. In the above, an example has been described in which DRX information is mapped to MCCH and notified from a base station in MBSFN Area to a mobile terminal. Similarly, the same effect can be obtained by mapping DRX information to BCCH and notifying the mobile terminal from the base station in the MBSFN area. Furthermore, the same effect can be obtained by mapping DRX information to BCCH and notifying the mobile terminal from the serving base station. Furthermore, the same effect can be obtained even if the DRX information is determined as static or semi-static. This eliminates the need for notification, so that the effect of effective use of radio resources can also be obtained.

A specific example of the MBMS reception time missing reception parameter will be further described. As described above, Non-Patent Document 1 discloses that the paging group is notified by the L1 / L2 signaling channel (PDCCH). Whether or not the L1 / L2 signaling channel exists in the radio resource transmitted from the MBMS dedicated cell has not yet been determined. In this embodiment, it is assumed that there is no L1 / L2 signaling channel in radio resources transmitted from an MBMS dedicated cell. However, it is preferable that the paging notification methods for the unicast cell, MBMS / unicast mixed cell, and MBMS transmission dedicated cell existing in the same mobile communication system called LTE be unified as much as possible. This is because the unification of the mobile communication system can be avoided by unifying. In the following description, the number of paging groups (hereinafter referred to as K _MBMS ) is considered as a parameter for reception of missing MBMS reception time. Next, a case where a plurality of base stations are arranged as shown in FIG. 25 and each MBSFN area is code division multiplexed as shown in FIG. 27 will be described. In this case, the DRX information is the same as that in the case of the time division multiplexing, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, “MBMS service selection” described in the first embodiment will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. In step ST1730, the mobile terminal confirms the service content included in the MBMS area information in order to know whether the user-desired service is being performed in the corresponding MBMS area. When a user-desired service is performed in the MBSFN area, the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST1731. If the service desired by the user is not provided, the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST1733. In Step ST1731, the mobile terminal receives a reference signal (RS) using radio resources in the MBSFN area and measures received power (RSRP). It is determined whether or not the received power is equal to or greater than a threshold value determined statically or semi-statically. If the threshold is equal to or higher than the threshold, it indicates that the sensitivity is satisfactory for receiving the MBMS service, and if the threshold is less than the threshold, it indicates that the sensitivity for receiving the MBMS service is not satisfied. If it is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the process proceeds to step ST1732, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value, the process proceeds to step ST1733. In Step ST1732, the mobile terminal obtains an MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency f (MBMS) and an MBSFN area ID for the user to receive a desired MBMS service. On the other hand, in step ST1733, the mobile terminal determines whether there is another MBMS area that can be received within the same frequency (f (MBMS)). This step ST1733 is particularly effective when there is an MBSFN area (MBSFN area 4) to be covered as shown in FIG. If there is another MBMS area that can be received within the same frequency (f (MBMS)), the process returns to step ST1730 and is repeated. When it does not exist, it transfers to step ST1734. In step 1734, the mobile terminal determines whether another frequency exists in the frequency list of the receivable MBSFN synchronization area received in step ST1708. If it exists, the process returns to step ST1722, and the process is repeated by switching the synthesizer to a new frequency (f2 (MBMS)). If not, the process returns to step ST1720 and repeats the process. Further, instead of receiving the reference signal in step 1731 and measuring the received power, it is also possible to actually receive and decode the MBMS service (MTCH or / and MCCH) in the MBSFN area. In this case, the user himself / herself can determine whether or not the reception sensitivity is acceptable by listening or viewing the decoded data. If permitted, the process proceeds to step ST1732, and if not permitted, the process proceeds to step ST1733. Since there are individual differences in permissible reception sensitivity for each user, an effect of becoming a mobile terminal more suitable for the user can be obtained.

Step 1735 in FIG. 19 is a process indicating “MBMS reception time missing reception preparation” described in the first embodiment. In Step ST1735, the mobile terminal performs MBMS reception time missing reception preparation using the MBMS reception time missing reception parameter received in Step ST1729. Specifically, the paging group of its own mobile terminal is calculated using paging group number K _MBMS received in step ST1729. The mobile terminal identification ID (UE-ID, IMSI) is used to calculate the paging group. The paging group is represented by IMSI mod K _MBMS .

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart for explaining the MBMS-side reception status notification process. This process will be described more specifically with respect to “MBMS side reception status notification” described in the first embodiment with reference to FIG. In FIG. 20, in step ST1736, the mobile terminal changes the set frequency of frequency conversion section 1107, and changes the center frequency to the frequency of the unicast / mixed frequency layer (hereinafter referred to as f (unicast)). Move to the unicast / mixed frequency layer. In Step ST1737, the mobile terminal transmits an uplink scheduling request (UL Scheduling Request) to the serving cell. In Step ST1738, the serving cell receives an uplink scheduling request from the mobile terminal. In Step ST1739, the serving cell performs uplink scheduling (UL Scheduling) to allocate uplink radio resources to the mobile terminal. In Step ST1740, the serving cell transmits uplink radio resource allocation (also referred to as UL allocation or Grant) to the mobile terminal, which is a result of the uplink scheduling in Step ST1739, to the mobile terminal. A mobile terminal receives UL allocation from a serving cell in step ST1741. In Step ST1742, the mobile terminal transmits an “MBMS side reception status notification” to the serving cell according to the UL allocation received in Step ST1741. Examples of parameters included in the “MBMS reception status notification” include mobile terminal identifiers (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.), MBMS service reception frequency (f (MBMS)), MBSFN Area number (ID). )and so on. In Step ST1743, the serving cell performs reception processing for receiving various parameters transmitted from the mobile terminal by the “MBMS-side reception status notification” processing in Step ST1742. In step ST1743, the network side receives the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission without adding an uplink to the MBMS dedicated cell, that is, without increasing the complexity as a mobile communication system. You can know that it is. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to change from the configuration in which the network side notifies the normal paging signal to the MBMS reception time missing configuration. In step ST1744, the serving cell transmits, to the MME, the parameter transmitted in the “MBMS side reception status notification” performed by the mobile terminal in step ST1742. In Step ST1745, the MME receives this.

  In Step ST1746, the MME determines a tracking area (hereinafter referred to as TA (MBMS)) that is receiving the MBMS service at the frequency dedicated to MBMS transmission of the mobile terminal. When determining the tracking area, the MME determines based on the MBMS side reception status notification (MBMS side reception status parameters, f (MBMS) and MBSFN area number) notified from the mobile terminal via the serving cell in step ST 1742. In step ST1747, the tracking area list of the mobile terminal is updated. In Step ST1747, the TA list including TA (unicast) and / or TA (MBMS) is managed (saved, added, updated, deleted). TA (unicast) is a tracking area of the mobile terminal in the unicast / mixed frequency layer. FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the details of the tracking area list. Hereinafter, a specific example of tracking area list management will be described with reference to FIG. The tracking area list is managed for each mobile terminal as shown in FIG. In the example of FIG. 31A, TAs of UE # 1 are TA (unicast) # 1 and TA (unicast) # 2, and TAs of UE # 2 are TA (unicast) # 1 and TA (MBMS) # 1. It is. Further, the MME also manages base stations included in each tracking area (TA (unicast)). This will be described with reference to FIG. TA (unicast) # 1 includes MBMS / unicast mixed cells with cell IDs 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. Also, TA (unicast) # 2 includes MBMS / unicast mixed cells with cell IDs 23, 24, and 25. Next, description will be made with reference to FIG. TA (MBMS) # 1 corresponds to an MBSFN area ID in which the mobile terminal receives an MBMS service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. In other words, in the present invention, in step ST 1742, the parameter is transmitted from the mobile terminal by “MBMS side reception status notification”, and in step ST 1745, the MME uses the parameters f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID as a TA. (MBMS) will be determined.

  Details of the management of the TA list in step ST1747 will be described. The MME searches for the TA (MBMS) number managed in the MME based on the f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID received in step ST1745 (for example, using FIG. 31 (c)). Next, it is determined whether TA (MBMS) found as a result of the search exists in the TA list of the mobile terminal. If it exists, the current TA list is saved. If not, the TA (MBMS) is added to the TA list of the mobile terminal. In Step ST1748, the MME transmits a response signal Ack indicating that the MBMS side reception status notification has been received to the serving cell. It is possible to include the TA list of the mobile terminal in this response signal. In step ST1749, the serving cell receives an MBck side reception status notification Ack from the MME, and in step ST1750 transmits an MBMS side reception status notification Ack to the mobile terminal. In Step ST1751, the mobile terminal receives an Ack of MBMS side reception status notification from the serving cell. In Step ST1752, the mobile terminal changes the set frequency of the frequency conversion section 1107 and moves to the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission by changing the center frequency to the frequency of the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission (f (MBMS)). .

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the unicast-side measurement process. Hereinafter, the “unicast side measurement” described in the first embodiment will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. In Step ST1753, the mobile terminal determines whether the DRX period start timing of the MBMS service has arrived using the DRX information received in Step ST1729 of FIG. As a specific example, the first SFN number at which the DRX period starts is obtained using the DRX cycle and the starting point value (DRX) of the parameter example received in step ST1729, and is mapped to BCCH (broadcast control channel) or the like. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not it is the DRX period start timing. A specific calculation example is SFN = DRX cycle × α + starting point value (DRX) α: a positive integer. When it is not a start timing, it transfers to step ST1772. When it is a start timing, it transfers to step ST1754. A mobile terminal judges whether it is the measurement period in the MBMS / unicast mixed cell received in step ST1705 in step ST1754. When it is not a measurement cycle, it transfers to step ST1772. When it is a measurement period, it transfers to step ST1755. In Step ST1755, the mobile terminal changes the set frequency of the frequency conversion unit 1107 (synthesizer) and changes the center frequency to f (Unicast) to receive the downlink signal of the MBMS / unicast mixed cell. In Step ST1756, the mobile terminal performs measurement on the unicast side (unicast cell or / and MBMS / unicast mixed cell). As values actually measured by the mobile terminal, RSRP, RSSI, and the like of the serving cell and neighboring cells are conceivable. The information on neighboring cells may be broadcast from the serving cell as neighboring cell information (list).

  In Step ST1757, the mobile terminal determines whether or not re-selection of the serving cell (cell re-selection) is necessary as a result of the measurement in Step ST1756. As a specific example of the determination, there may be a case where the measurement result of one of the neighboring cells exceeds the measurement result of the serving cell. If reselection is not necessary, the process proceeds to step ST1771. If reselection is necessary, steps ST1758 and 1759 are executed. A base station (new serving cell) to be newly selected as a serving cell in step 1758 is subordinate to the measurement period, intermittent reception period, and tracking area information (TA information) in BCCH (broadcast control channel) as in step ST1705. Informs the mobile terminal. In Step ST1759, the mobile terminal receives the BCCH from the new serving cell and decodes it to receive the measurement period, intermittent reception period, and TA information. The description from step ST1761 to step ST1770 is the same as the description from step ST1710 to step ST1719, and will be omitted. In Step ST1771, the mobile terminal moves to the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission by changing the set frequency of the frequency converting unit 1107 and changing the center frequency to f (MBMS).

  Through the “Unicast side measurement” process from step ST1753 to step ST1771, the mobile terminal can receive a unicast cell or / and a mixed MBMS / unicast cell even if it is receiving an MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer. Measurement is possible. As a result, the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer can secure mobility in the unicast cell or / and the MBMS / unicast mixed cell. Thereby, the effect that it becomes possible to ensure the mobility in the MBMS dedicated cell without an uplink via a MBMS / unicast mixed cell can be acquired. For this reason, it is possible to receive a paging signal even in a mobile terminal receiving an MBMS service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. In addition, even in a mobile terminal that is receiving a service in the MBSFN transmission-dedicated frequency layer, downlink synchronization establishment through measurement with a unicast cell or MBMS / unicast mixed cell is performed according to a measurement cycle. As a result, the mobile terminal that has received the paging signal in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission that does not have an uplink, which is the second problem of the present invention, can respond to the paging signal in the unicast cell or the MBMS / unicast mixed cell. Even when a response is transmitted, an effect that can be realized with a small control delay can be obtained.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the intermittent reception processing at the time of MBMS reception. FIG. 22 is a more specific description of “intermittent reception at the time of MBMS reception” described in the first embodiment with reference to FIG. . In Step ST1772 of FIG. 21, the mobile terminal determines whether it is the MCCH reception timing of the MBSFN area number being received based on the MCCH scheduling information. That is, the mobile terminal determines whether it is the MCCH reception timing using the MCCH (multicast control channel) scheduling received in step ST1725. Specifically, the MCCH repetition period of the parameter example received in step ST1725, the head SFN number to which the MCCH is mapped is obtained using the starting point value, and the MCCH is mapped based on the SFN mapped to the BCCH or the like. It is determined whether or not it is the head SFN number to which the MCCH is mapped by determining whether or not it is the head. When it is not the head timing to which MCCH is mapped, it transfers to step ST1753. When it is the head timing to which MCCH is mapped, it transfers to step ST1773. In addition, step ST1772 may be determined for each MCCH repetition period 1 in FIG. 26, for example.

  Here, in step ST1772, the MCCH reception timing (the first SFN number to which the MCCH is mapped) and the intermittent reception cycle at the time of MBMS reception may be different. By making it separate, it becomes possible to set the intermittent reception cycle at the time of MBMS reception to “long” or “short” according to the network conditions, etc., and it is possible to construct a mobile communication system with a higher degree of freedom. Become. The intermittent reception period at the time of MBMS reception may be mapped from the serving cell to BCCH in step ST1707 and notified to the mobile terminal, or may be mapped from the MBMS dedicated cell to BCCH and notified to the mobile terminal in step ST1723. . Further, in step ST1728, the MBMS dedicated cell may be mapped to MCCH and notified to the mobile terminal. Specifically, in step ST1772, it is determined whether it is the intermittent reception timing at the time of MBMS reception. If it is the intermittent reception timing, the process proceeds to step 1784. If it is not intermittent reception timing, it is determined whether it is MCCH reception timing, and if it is MCCH reception timing, it will transfer to step ST1788. If it is not the MCCH reception timing, the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST1753 in FIG.

  When paging occurs in the corresponding mobile terminal in step ST1773, in step ST1774, the MME tracks the mobile terminal tracking area based on the identifier (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.) of the mobile terminal that is the destination of paging. (TA) Check the list. In Step ST1775, the MME determines whether TA (MBMS) is included in the tracking area list of the mobile terminal. As a specific example, the tracking area list of the mobile terminal is searched based on the UE-ID in the list as shown in FIG. When the mobile terminal is UE # 1 (UE-ID # 1) in FIG. 31A, it is determined that TA (MBMS) is not included. On the other hand, if the mobile terminal is UE # 2 (UE-ID # 2) in FIG. 31A, since TA (MBMS) # 1 is included, it is determined that TA (MBMS) is included. To do. When TA (MBMS) is not included, it transfers to step ST1814. If TA (MBMS) is included, the process proceeds to step ST1776. In Step ST1776, the MME transmits a paging request to the MCE. That is, the MME 103 in FIG. 10 transmits a paging request to the MCE 801 using the MME-MCE interface. As MCEs that transmit a paging request from the MME, all MCEs that manage base stations that are geographically overlapped with the base stations managed by the MME are conceivable.

Specific examples of parameters in the paging request include mobile terminal identifiers (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.), TA (MBMS) numbers, and the like. At this time, instead of the TA (MBMS) number, both f (MBMS) and the MBSFN area ID, or only the MBSFN area ID may be used. In step ST1777, the MCE receives the paging request. Among the MCEs that have received the paging request in Step ST1778, the MCE that is notified as a parameter in the paging request and controls the MBSFN area ID associated with the TA (MBMS) number prepares for paging transmission. On the other hand, the MCE that does not control the MBSFN area ID associated with the TA (MBMS) number does not prepare for paging transmission. As a specific example of paging transmission preparation, the paging group of the mobile terminal is calculated using the paging group number K _MBMS of the own base station (own MBSFN area) and the received paging request. In the calculation, the same formula as that used on the mobile terminal side is used (Paging group = IMSI mod K _MBMS ). As described above, the method for managing the association between the TA (MBMS) number (MBSFN area) and the MCE on the MCE side that has received the paging request is the relationship between the MBSFN area ID and the MCE that controls the MBS service ID. Since it can be performed only within the architecture, that is, it can be performed independently of the MME, it is possible to obtain an effect that a mobile communication system with a high degree of freedom can be constructed.

  Further, the MME manages the MBSFN area ID related to the TA (MBMS) number as shown in FIG. 31 (c), and further, as shown in FIG. 31 (d), the MBSFN area ID and the MCE that controls the MBSFN area ID. Consider the case of managing numbers. In that case, in Step ST1776, the MME transmits a paging request only to the MCE that manages the MBSFN area ID related to the TA (MBMS) number. As a specific example of the parameter in the paging request at that time, an identifier of the mobile terminal can be considered. The MCE that has received the paging request in Step ST1778 prepares for paging transmission as described above. As described above, in the method of managing the relationship between the MBSFN area ID and the MCE that controls the ID within the MME (FIG. 31D), the number of MCEs that notify the paging request from the MME decreases, so that the resource is effective. The effect that can be utilized is obtained. Further, since the amount of information to be notified is reduced, it is possible to obtain an effect that resources can be effectively used.

  Further, the MME manages the MBSFN area ID related to the TA (MBMS) number as shown in FIG. 31 (c), and further, as shown in FIG. 31 (e), the MBMS included in the MBSFN area ID and the MBSFN area ID. Consider a case where the cell ID of a dedicated cell and / or MBMS / unicast mixed cell is managed. In this case, in step ST1776, the MME transmits a paging request to the cell included in the MBSFN area ID managed by the MME, not the MCE. As a specific example of the parameter in the paging request at that time, an identifier of the mobile terminal can be considered. As described above, the method of managing the relationship between the MBSFN area ID and the cells included in the MBSFN area ID in the MME (FIG. 31 (e)) does not require the MCE to perform processing related to paging signal transmission of the mobile terminal. Get better. This eliminates the need to add a function to the MCE, so that the effect of avoiding the complexity of the MCE can be obtained. In addition, an effect of reducing the processing load of the MCE can be obtained.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a channel configuration example for mapping a paging signal in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer. FIG. 32A is a diagram showing a configuration including MBMS related information and a paging signal on a PMCH (Physical multicast channel). MBMS-related information is carried on the logical channels MTCH and MCCH for MBMS. The MBMS-related information and the paging signal may exist as information elements in the MTCH and MCCH, respectively, or the physical area (resource) to which each is mapped may be time-division multiplexed. All cells in a certain MBSFN area periodically perform multi-cell transmission of MCCH in the MBSFN area in the PMCH corresponding to the MBSFN area. On the other hand, a mobile terminal that is receiving or intending to receive an MBMS service transmitted in a multi-cell manner from a cell in the MBSFN area periodically receives the MCCH, and receives the contents of the MBMS service, the frame configuration, etc. The MBMS service can be received.

  By including a paging signal in the MCCH, it is possible to receive paging information when a mobile terminal receiving or attempting to receive an MBMS service receives the MCCH. This eliminates the need for the mobile terminal to separately receive paging at a timing other than receiving the MCCH, and thus enables paging to be received without interrupting reception of the MBMS service. Further, the DRX operation (reception operation is stopped) can be performed during the time when the MCCH is not received and the time when the MBMS service is not received, and the power consumption of the mobile terminal can be reduced. Also, the MCCH and the PCCH carrying the paging signal may be configured in the same MBSFN subframe, or the MBSFN subframe carrying the MCCH and the MBSFN subframe carrying the paging signal may be temporally adjacent to each other. You can leave it. With this configuration, it is possible to continuously receive a paging signal when a mobile terminal that is receiving or intending to receive an MBMS service receives an MCCH. This eliminates the need for the mobile terminal to receive for paging at timings other than receiving successive MBSFN subframes carrying MCCHs and paging signals, and therefore receives the paging signal without interrupting reception of the MBMS service. It becomes possible. Further, the DRX operation can be performed during the time when the MCCH and the paging signal are not received and the time when the MBMS service is not received, so that the power consumption of the mobile terminal can be reduced.

  FIG. 32B discloses a configuration in which an indicator indicating whether the MBMS control information has been changed and an indicator indicating whether a paging signal has been transmitted are provided. An indicator that indicates whether the MBMS control information has been changed is an MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicator, and an indicator that indicates whether a paging signal has been transmitted is a paging signal presence / absence indicator. The physical area to which the indicator is mapped may be provided in an MBSFN subframe in which the PMCH is transmitted, or may be provided in a physical area temporally adjacent to the MBSFN subframe in which the PMCH is transmitted. By doing so, the mobile terminal can receive and decode the MCCH or paging signal on the PMCH immediately after receiving the indicator. Specifically, for example, 1-bit information is used as an indicator. Each indicator is multiplied by a spreading code specific to the MBSFN area and mapped to a predetermined physical area. As another method, for example, each indicator may be composed of a sequence specific to the MBSFN area and may be mapped to a predetermined physical area. When the mobile terminal receives an incoming call, for example, the paging signal presence / absence indicator is set to “1”, and when there is no incoming call, the paging signal presence / absence indicator is set to “0”. Also, for example, when the MBMS control information on the MCCH is changed due to the change of the content of the MBMS service transmitted in the MBSFN area, for example, the change presence / absence indicator of the MBMS related information is set to “1”. . A cycle (MBMS modification period) in which MBMS related information including one or more MBMS control information and an MBMS related information change presence / absence indicator can be changed is determined, and an MBMS related information change presence / absence indicator “1” is determined within the cycle. Is sent repeatedly. The MBMS modification period, start timing (SFN, starting point), etc. may be determined in advance, or may be notified by broadcast information from a serving cell in a unicast service or from an MBMS dedicated cell. If there is no further change in the MBMS related information after the MBMS change period has elapsed, for example, an MBMS related information change presence / absence indicator is set to “0”. The mobile terminal receives an indicator in the MCCH of the desired MBSFN area, performs despreading, etc., and determines whether the indicator is 1 or 0, so that whether the MBMS-related information existing in the MCCH has changed or not It is possible to determine whether a paging signal is present.

  By providing the indicator in this manner, when there is no change in the MBMS control information or when there is no paging signal, the mobile terminal does not need to receive or / and decode the entire PMCH information. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the reception power of the mobile terminal. By determining a cycle in which MBMS related information can be changed and transmitting the same MBMS control information at least once within the one cycle period, the mobile terminal transmits the same MBMS control information at least once. Since reception is possible, the reception error rate of MBMS control information can be reduced, and therefore the reception quality of the MBMS service can be improved. The physical area to which the MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicator indicating whether the MBMS control information has been changed may be the first MBSFN subframe of one or more MBSFN subframes to which the MBMS control information is mapped. Further, it may be the first OFDM symbol of the first MBSFN subframe. Accordingly, the mobile terminal can determine whether the MBMS control information has changed by receiving the first OFDM symbol.

  Further, a physical area to which a paging signal presence / absence indicator indicating whether or not a paging signal is present may be used as the first MBSFN subframe of one or a plurality of MBSFN subframes to which the paging signal is mapped. Further, it may be the first OFDM symbol of the first MBSFN subframe. As a result, the mobile terminal can determine whether a paging signal exists by receiving the first OFDM symbol. By mapping each indicator to the physical area as described above, when there is no MBMS control signal change, when there is no paging information, it is not necessary to receive or / and decode each subsequent OFDM symbol. It is possible to reduce received power. In addition, since it can be determined early with the first MBSFN subframe or the first OFDM symbol, the MBMS control information can be received immediately or the paging signal can be received immediately. Control delay can be reduced.

  As an indicator, the MBMS related information change presence / absence indicator and the paging signal presence / absence indicator may be mapped to the same physical area, or may be mapped to different physical areas. When mapping to the same physical area, an OR operation of each indicator may be taken. As a result, the mobile terminal needs only one indicator to receive, so the effect of simplifying the receiving circuit configuration can be obtained. In the case of mapping to different physical areas, the mobile terminal only needs to receive necessary indicators, and does not need to receive other indicators. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the reception power of the mobile terminal and further reduce the reception delay of necessary information. For example, a mobile terminal that has received an MBMS service but is set not to receive a paging signal need only receive an MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicator, and eliminates the need to receive a paging signal presence / absence indicator. Can do. If the MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicator and the paging signal presence / absence indicator are mapped to different physical regions, the reception timing of MCCH (first SFN number to which MCCH is mapped) or the MBMS-related change presence / absence indicator in step ST1772. When the repetition period and the paging signal presence / absence indicator repetition period are set to different values, only the MBMS related information change presence / absence indicator repetition period is received or / and decoded in the MCCH reception timing or MBMS related change presence / absence indicator repetition period. In the signal presence / absence indicator repetition period, only the paging signal presence / absence indicator can be received or / and decoded. As a result, the processing time of the mobile terminal can be shortened, and the effect of reducing power consumption can be obtained.

  The repetition period of each indicator may be the same or different. The repetition period of each indicator may be the same as or different from the repetition period of MCCH. For example, the repetition cycle of the MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicator is the same as the MCCH repetition cycle, and the paging signal presence / absence indicator repetition cycle is n times the MCCH repetition cycle (n is an integer of 2 or more). . By doing so, it becomes possible to “long” and “short” the setting of the intermittent reception period at the time of MBMS reception according to the network conditions, etc., and it becomes possible to construct a mobile communication system with a higher degree of freedom. . The repetition period of the indicator is a paging signal presence / absence indicator repetition period (Repetition period) and an MBMS-related change presence / absence indicator repetition period (Repetition period), respectively. The start timing (SFN, starting point) of the MBSFN subframe in which the indicator exists, the subframe number, the repetition period of each indicator, etc. may be notified by the broadcast information of the serving cell of the unicast service, or the broadcast of the MBMS dedicated cell It may be notified by information or may be determined in advance. In this case, the mobile terminal performs step ST1772, or step ST1788, or step ST1789 for each MBMS-related change presence / absence indicator repetition period. The channel dedicated to the MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicator may be, for example, a MICH (MBMS Indicating CHannel), and a paging signal presence / absence indicator may be configured in the MICH. The MICH repetition period is referred to as a “MICH repetition period”. The repetition period of the paging signal presence / absence indicator may be the same as or different from the MICH repetition period. The notification of the indicator can be performed by the same method described above. In this case, the mobile terminal performs step ST1772 or step ST1784 for each paging signal presence / absence indicator repetition period. Thereby, the time when each indicator is transmitted is not limited to the time when MCCH is transmitted, and the system can be designed flexibly.

  When the paging signal is included in the PMCH, there is a problem that it takes too much time to detect the paging signal addressed to the own mobile terminal when the number of mobile terminals that have received calls becomes enormous. Further, there arises a problem that an area for mapping paging signals of all mobile terminals that have received incoming calls cannot be secured in a predetermined physical area carrying a paging signal. In order to solve these problems, a paging grouping method is disclosed. FIG. 32C shows a paging grouping method. All mobile terminals are divided into K groups, and a paging signal presence / absence indicator is provided for each group. The physical area for paging signal presence / absence indicator in MCCH is divided into K pieces, and the paging signal presence / absence indicator of each group is mapped to each of the divided physical areas. Here, K can take from 1 to the value of the total number of mobile terminals. When an incoming call is received at a certain mobile terminal, the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the group to which the mobile terminal belongs is set to “1”. When all mobile terminals belonging to a certain group do not receive an incoming call, the paging signal presence / absence indicator of that group is set to “0”. The paging signal presence / absence indicator may be subjected to repetition or the like in order to satisfy a desired reception error rate at the mobile terminal. The physical area to which the paging signal is mapped is also divided into K pieces so as to correspond to the K groups. The paging signal may be an identifier (identification number, identification code) for each mobile terminal. One physical area divided into K is a physical area in which paging signal data required by one mobile terminal is accommodated by adding the number of mobile terminals in the group. The number of mobile terminals in a group may be the same for all groups, or may be different for each group.

  For example, the number of mobile terminals in the group may be an average value of the number of mobile terminals that simultaneously receive incoming calls. Alternatively, the number of mobile terminals that can be assigned to one OFDM symbol in the entire frequency band may be used, and each OFDM symbol may be associated with each group. When an incoming call arrives at a certain mobile terminal, the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the group to which the mobile terminal belongs is set to “1” and mapped to the physical area for the paging signal presence / absence indicator corresponding to the group. At the same time, the paging signal for the mobile terminal that has received the incoming call is mapped to the physical area of the paging signal corresponding to the group to which the mobile terminal belongs. The mapping of the paging signal to the physical area is performed by multiplying each mobile terminal by an identification code unique to the mobile terminal. The paging signal may be an identifier for each mobile terminal. In this case, the control for multiplying the mobile terminal specific identification code can be omitted. The mobile terminal receives the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the group to which the mobile terminal belongs to determine whether an incoming call has been made to the group to which the mobile terminal belongs. When it is determined that the incoming call is received, the physical area to which the paging signal associated with the group to which the mobile terminal belongs is received and decoded. After decoding, blind detection is performed by performing correlation calculation with an identification code unique to the mobile terminal, and it is possible to determine that there is an incoming call to the mobile terminal by specifying a paging signal for the mobile terminal. Become. If no paging signal for the mobile terminal is detected, it is determined that there is no incoming call to the mobile terminal.

  By grouping the mobile terminals into K groups, the mobile terminal does not need to receive the entire paging signal area, and only receives the necessary area, that is, the physical area to which the group to which the mobile terminal belongs corresponds. As a result, the paging signal detection time at the mobile terminal can be shortened, and further, the reception power of the mobile terminal can be reduced because it is not necessary to receive the corresponding physical area of the group to which the mobile terminal does not belong. Furthermore, by using a paging signal presence / absence indicator corresponding to each group, a paging signal presence / absence indicator can be provided with few physical resources even when there are a large number of mobile terminals. Furthermore, the mobile terminal only needs to receive the paging signal area as needed, and it is possible to reduce the reception power of the mobile terminal, and when it is not necessary to receive the paging signal, the mobile terminal immediately moves to the next operation. Therefore, the control delay can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, one physical area divided into K pieces for mapping the paging signal is obtained by adding the physical area in which the paging signal data required by one mobile terminal is accommodated by the number of mobile terminals in the group. It was in the physical area. However, when the number of mobile terminals increases, the required physical area increases, and the overhead for transmitting the MBMS service increases, so the transmission speed of MBMS service data decreases. In order to prevent this, the paging signal for the mobile terminal is multiplied by an identification code unique to the mobile terminal for each mobile terminal. As a result, the mobile terminal can perform blind detection (Blind Detection) using the identification code unique to the mobile terminal to determine whether the information is addressed to the mobile terminal itself. There is no need to fix the area in advance. Therefore, a physical area for paging signals for all mobile terminals is not required, and it is sufficient if there is an area for the number of mobile terminals that are expected to actually receive incoming calls. As an example, there is a method in which the number of mobile terminals in the group is an average value of the number of mobile terminals that receive incoming calls simultaneously. This method makes it possible to effectively use limited physical resources. In addition, by using the above method, even when the number of mobile terminals receiving more than expected is increased, it becomes possible to transmit a paging signal to a new incoming mobile terminal on the next PMCH, etc. It becomes possible to respond flexibly by scheduling at the base station.

  When the total number of mobile terminals is small, only the paging signal presence / absence indicator may be transmitted with the value of K as the total number of mobile terminals. In this case, it is not necessary to secure a paging-related physical area, and it is sufficient to secure physical areas for paging signal presence / absence indicators for the number of all mobile terminals. For this reason, the efficiency of radio resources can be improved. In this case, there is a physical area for a paging signal presence / absence indicator corresponding to each mobile terminal. For this reason, in the mobile terminal, it is possible to determine the presence / absence of an incoming call without receiving the paging signal area only by receiving and decoding the physical area for the paging signal presence / absence indicator corresponding to the mobile terminal. The control delay in the paging operation can be reduced.

  FIG. 33 shows an example of a method for mapping a paging signal to a physical area carrying a paging signal on the PMCH. Of the mobile terminals belonging to the paging group n, the paging signal is mapped to the physical area for the group n for the mobile terminals n1, n2, etc. that are receiving calls. The base station multiplies the paging signal of each mobile terminal by an identification code (number, sequence) unique to the mobile terminal, adds a CRC, and performs processing such as encoding and rate matching. When the paging signal is an identifier for each mobile terminal, the control for multiplying the mobile terminal specific identification code can be omitted. The result of the series of processes is assigned to information element units corresponding to the size of the physical area to be mapped, and connected to each mobile terminal that is receiving an incoming call. The concatenated result is subjected to scrambling processing, modulation processing, and the like using a scrambling code unique to the MBSFN area. The modulation process may be specific to the MBSFN area. The result of performing these processes is mapped to the physical area corresponding to the paging group n. At this time, the base station sets “1” in the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the paging group n and maps it to the physical area of the paging group n of the paging signal presence / absence indicator. The physical area corresponding to the paging group n may be determined in advance or may be notified from the unicast-side serving cell or the MBMS dedicated cell as broadcast information. The mobile terminal receives the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the paging group to which the mobile terminal belongs, and if “1”, receives the paging signal physical area corresponding to the paging group. The paging signal physical area is received, demodulated, descrambled by the MBSFN area specific scrambling code, and the result is divided into information element units. By performing a process such as decoding for each divided information element unit and performing a correlation operation using an identification number unique to the mobile terminal, the paging signal for the mobile terminal is blind-detected. If the correlation calculation result is greater than a certain threshold, it is determined that there is paging for the mobile terminal, and a paging incoming operation is started by a paging signal. If it is less than a certain threshold value, it is determined that there is no paging for the terminal itself, and the process shifts to reception of MBMS related information, or shifts to the DRX operation if there is no need to receive MBMS related information. Which group the own mobile terminal belongs to may be derived by a predetermined calculation method, or may be notified from a higher layer as a broadcast information from a serving cell or MBMS dedicated cell of unicast service.

  FIG. 34 shows another example of a method for mapping a paging signal to a physical area carrying a paging signal on the PMCH. Of the mobile terminals belonging to the paging group n, the paging signal is mapped to the physical area for the group n for the mobile terminals n1, n2, etc. that are receiving calls. The base station adds CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) to the paging signal of each mobile terminal, and performs processing such as encoding and rate matching. The results of these processes are multiplied by an identification code (number) unique to the mobile terminal. The orthogonality is obtained between the mobile terminals by using an identification code unique to the mobile terminal as a spreading code having orthogonality. The base station multiplexes the result of multiplying the spreading code for each mobile terminal that is receiving an incoming call. The multiplexed result is subjected to scrambling processing, modulation processing, and the like using a scrambling code unique to the MBSFN area. The modulation process may be specific to the MBSFN area. The result of performing these processes is mapped to the physical area corresponding to the paging group n. At this time, the base station sets “1” in the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the paging group n and maps it to the physical area of the paging group n of the paging signal presence / absence indicator. The physical area corresponding to the paging group n may be determined in advance, or may be notified as broadcast information from the unicast-side serving cell or the MBMS dedicated cell.

  The mobile terminal receives the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the paging group to which the mobile terminal belongs, and if “1”, receives the paging signal physical area corresponding to the paging group. The paging signal physical area is received, demodulated, and descrambled by an MBSFN area-specific scrambling code. By performing a correlation operation on the result using an identification number unique to the mobile terminal, a paging signal for the mobile terminal is blind-detected. When the correlation calculation result is larger than a certain threshold, it is determined that there is paging for the mobile terminal, and the paging incoming operation is started by the paging signal after decoding. If it is less than a certain threshold value, it is determined that there is no paging for the terminal, and the process shifts to reception of MBMS related information, or shifts to the DRX operation if it is not necessary to receive MBMS related information. Which group the own mobile terminal belongs to may be derived by a predetermined calculation method, or may be notified from a higher layer as a broadcast information from a serving cell or MBMS dedicated cell of unicast service. Note that the paging signal described in FIGS. 33 and 34 may be a transport channel to which the paging signal is mapped. This can be applied to the following embodiments. Any information that carries a paging signal, which is paging-related information required when the mobile terminal receives paging, may be used.

  Several methods for mapping the paging signal to the area carrying the paging signal of the PMCH have been disclosed. It may be mapped to a physical area continuous on the axis) or may be mapped to a distributed (physical area distributed on the frequency axis).

  In the above example, the paging signal is multiplied by an identification number or spreading code unique to the mobile terminal. By adopting such a configuration, when the information amount of the paging signal is the same in each mobile terminal, the size of the area in units of information elements to be allocated by making the processing such as encoding and rate matching the same between the mobile terminals. Can be made the same. Therefore, since the size of the information element unit area for blind detection in the mobile terminal is limited to one, the number of blind detections can be reduced, and the detection time can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an effect that the circuit configuration of the mobile terminal, power consumption, and control delay can be reduced.

  As described above, the mobile terminal receives the entire paging signal area by multiplying the paging signal by the identification number or spreading code unique to the mobile terminal and mapping it to the area where the paging signal of the PMCH is carried for each paging group. This eliminates the need to receive only the necessary area, that is, only the physical area to which the group to which the mobile terminal belongs corresponds, so that the paging signal detection time at the mobile terminal can be shortened, and further the group to which the mobile terminal does not belong Therefore, the received power of the mobile terminal can be reduced. Furthermore, a paging signal presence / absence indicator corresponding to each group can be used, and even when there are a large number of mobile terminals, the paging signal presence / absence indicator can be provided with few physical resources. Furthermore, the mobile terminal only needs to receive the paging signal area as needed, and it is possible to reduce the reception power of the mobile terminal, and when it is not necessary to receive the paging signal, the mobile terminal immediately moves to the next operation. Therefore, the control delay can be reduced. Furthermore, since the mobile terminal can blindly detect whether the information is addressed to the mobile terminal by using an identification code or a spreading code unique to the mobile terminal, a physical area for mapping a paging signal for each mobile terminal Since there is no need to have a fixed paging signal area for all mobile terminals, there is no need for a physical area for paging signals for all mobile terminals, and there is only an area for the number of mobile terminals that are expected to actually receive calls. It is possible to effectively use physical resources. Furthermore, even if the number of mobile terminals that receive more than expected is increased, a paging signal to a new incoming mobile terminal can be transmitted on the PMCH carrying the next MCCH. It is possible to respond flexibly by scheduling.

  In the above example, the base station multiplies the paging signal by the identification number unique to the mobile terminal. However, it is also possible to use a method of multiplying CRC instead of a paging signal by an identification number unique to the mobile terminal. The method of multiplying the CRC by the identification number unique to the mobile terminal is effective when the information amount of the paging signal of each mobile terminal is different. By adopting the method of putting a paging signal on the PMCH disclosed above, the mobile communication system can transmit the paging signal of all mobile terminals that are receiving or intending to receive the MBMS service from the MBMS dedicated cell. This enables the mobile terminal to receive a paging signal from the MBMS dedicated cell.

  Hereinafter, the channel configuration for mapping the paging signal in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (c) and FIG. In Step ST1779, the MCE schedules the paging signal of the mobile terminal. Specifically, it is determined to which number of information elements mapped to the physical area assigned to the paging group number of the mobile terminal calculated in step ST1778 is assigned the mobile terminal identifier. By performing this scheduling in the MCE, the identifier of the mobile terminal is transmitted from the same physical resource of the base station included in the MBSFN area. As a result, the mobile terminal can receive the paging signal benefiting from the SFN gain by receiving the PMCH transmitted in multicell in the MBSFN area. In Step ST1780, the MCE transmits a paging request for the mobile terminal to the base station in the MBSFN area. Specific examples of parameters included in the paging request include mobile terminal identifiers (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.), and paging signal scheduling results (specifically, SFN and MBSFN subframes) performed in step ST1779. Number, information element number) and the like. In step ST1781, each base station in the MBSFN area receives a paging request from the MCE.

  Instead of providing the MME-MCE IF between the MME 103 and the MCE 801 shown in FIG. 10, an MME-MBMS GW interface may be provided between the MME 103 and the MBMS GW 802 (more specifically, the MBMS CP 802-1). Even if the processing contents of MCE from step ST1776 to step ST1780 are performed by the MBMS GW, the same effect as the present invention can be obtained.

In Step ST1782, each base station in the MBSFN area calculates the mobile terminal paging group. As a specific example of the calculation method, the paging group of the mobile terminal is calculated using the paging group number K _MBMS of the own base station (own MBSFN area) and the received paging request. In the calculation, the same formula as that used on the mobile terminal side is used (paging group = IMSI mod K _MBMS ). If the paging group of the mobile terminal is also notified in step ST1780, step ST1782 can be omitted. Thereby, effects, such as reduction of the control load of each base station in the MBSFN area, can be obtained. On the other hand, in the method of calculating the paging group in each base station in the MBSFN area in step ST1782 without notifying the paging group of the mobile terminal in step ST1780, notification information from the MCE to each base station in the MBSFN area Can be reduced, and the effect of effective use of resources can be obtained. Each base station in the MBSFN area in Step ST1783 uses the identifier of the mobile terminal received in Step ST1781, the scheduling result of the paging signal, the paging group of the mobile terminal calculated in Step ST1782, and the like. The PMCH carrying the above is transmitted. In this case, the above-described method can be used as a mapping method to a paging-related area in the PMCH, a specific mapping method to a physical channel, and the like.

  In Step ST1784, the mobile terminal receives the paging-related change presence / absence indicator corresponding to the paging group calculated in Step ST1735 of the own mobile terminal in the PMCH. In Step ST1785, the mobile terminal determines whether there is a change in the paging-related change presence / absence indicator. When there is no change, it transfers to step ST1788. If there is a change, the process proceeds to step ST1786. In Step ST1786, the mobile terminal continues to receive and decode the physical area to which the paging related information of the own paging group is mapped. At that time, blind detection is performed by performing a correlation calculation with an identification code unique to the mobile terminal. In step ST1787, the mobile terminal determines whether the identifier of the mobile terminal has been detected in the blind detection performed in step ST1786. When not detected, it transfers to step ST1788. If detected, the process proceeds to step ST1814. The contents described in steps ST1773 to ST1787 are specific examples of the “MBMS reception time missing reception configuration” described in the first embodiment. Thus, it is possible to disclose a paging signal notification method and a mobile communication system therefor for a mobile terminal receiving an MBMS service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, which is the first problem of the present invention. As a result, the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated for MBMS transmission can also receive the paging signal.

  Next, “MTCH reception” described in Embodiment 1 with reference to FIG. 17 will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. 22 and FIG. In Step ST1788, the mobile terminal determines whether the MBMS service in the MBSFN area is being continuously received. When not continuously receiving, it transfers to step ST1792. If continuous reception is in progress, the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST1789. In Step ST1789, the mobile terminal receives an MBMS-related change presence / absence indicator in the PMCH. In Step ST1790, the mobile terminal determines whether there is a change in the MBMS-related change presence / absence indicator. When there is no change, it transfers to step ST1791. If there is a change, the process proceeds to step ST1792. In Step ST1791, the mobile terminal does not change the MCCH at the reception timing of this MCCH, and therefore does not perform MBMS-related reception or / and decoding in the MCCH. The mobile terminal receives and decodes the MTCH without updating the control information (MCCH). In Step ST1792, the mobile terminal performs MBMS-related reception and decoding in the MCCH, and updates the control information. In Step ST1793, the mobile terminal receives and decodes the MTCH according to the control information received in Step ST1792.

  In Step ST1794 of FIG. 23, the mobile terminal measures the reception quality of the MBMS service being received. The mobile terminal receives the reference signal (RS) with the radio resource in the MBSFN area and measures the received power (RSRP). It is determined whether or not the received power is equal to or greater than a threshold value determined statically or semi-statically. If the threshold is equal to or higher than the threshold, it indicates that the sensitivity is satisfactory for receiving the MBMS service, and if the threshold is less than the threshold, it indicates that the sensitivity for receiving the MBMS service is not satisfied. If it is equal to or greater than the threshold, the process proceeds to step ST1795, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold, the process proceeds to step ST1796. Further, instead of receiving the reference signal in step 1794 and measuring the received power, it is also possible to actually receive and decode the MBMS service (MTCH or / and MCCH) in the MBSFN area. In that case, the user himself / herself can determine whether or not the reception sensitivity is acceptable by listening or viewing the decoded data. If allowed, the process proceeds to step ST1795, and if not permitted, the process proceeds to step ST1796. Since there are individual differences in permissible reception sensitivity for each user, an effect of becoming a mobile terminal more suitable for the user can be obtained. In step ST1795, the mobile terminal confirms the user's intention. If the user wants to continue receiving the currently received MBMS service, the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST1753. If the user wants to finish receiving the currently received MBMS service, the mobile terminal makes a transition to step ST1798. In Step ST1796, the mobile terminal determines whether there is another MBMS area that can be received within the same frequency (f (MBMS)). This step ST1796 is particularly effective when there is an MBSFN area to be covered. When it exists, it returns to step ST1730 and repeats a process. If not, the process proceeds to step ST1797.

  However, if another receivable MBMS area desired by the user is not found after that, the process of “MBMS reception end A” after step ST1798 is performed. Thereby, the network side can know that the said mobile terminal complete | finishes reception of the MBMS service in the frequency layer only for MBMS transmission. Accordingly, the configuration in which the network side notifies the paging signal to the mobile terminal in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission can be stopped. This makes it possible to cancel the paging signal to the mobile terminal from the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission that is not received by the mobile terminal as a mobile communication system, and has an effect of effective use of radio resources. . In step 1797, the mobile terminal determines whether another frequency exists in the frequency list of the receivable MBSFN synchronization area received in step ST1708. If it exists, the process returns to step ST1722, and the process is repeated by switching the synthesizer to a new frequency (f2 (MBMS)). If not, the process proceeds to step ST1798.

  Next, “MBMS reception end A” described in the first embodiment will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. In Step ST1798, the mobile terminal moves to the MBMS / unicast mixed cell by changing the set frequency of the frequency converting unit 1107 and changing the center frequency to f (unicast). The description of step ST1799 to step ST1803 is the same as the description of step ST1737 to step ST1741 and will be omitted. In Step ST1804, the mobile terminal transmits “MBMS reception end” to the serving cell according to the UL (Uplink) allocation received in Step ST1803. Examples of parameters included in “end of MBMS reception” include an identifier (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.) of a mobile terminal, a frequency (f (MBMS)) at which MBMS service reception ends, and an MBSFN area number (ID) and so on. In step ST1805, the serving cell receives the MBMS reception end from the mobile terminal. In step ST1805, the network side can know that the mobile terminal ends the reception of the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission without adding an uplink to the MBMS dedicated cell. Thereby, there is an effect that the network side can be changed from the MBMS reception time missing reception configuration to a configuration for notifying a normal paging signal. In step ST1806, the serving cell transmits an MBMS reception end to the MME. In Step ST1807, the MME receives the MBMS reception end from the serving cell.

  In Step ST1808, the MME searches for a TA (MBMS) for terminating the MBMS reception of the mobile terminal. An example of the relationship between the parameters included in the end of MBMS reception and TA (MBMS) is the same as that in step ST1747, and a description thereof will be omitted. In step ST1809, TA (MBMS) obtained as a result of the search in step ST1808 is deleted from the tracking area list of the mobile terminal. In Step ST1810, when the MME receives the signal notifying the end of MBMS reception transmitted via the serving cell, the MME transmits Ack as a response signal to the serving cell. As an example of parameters included in the response signal Ack, a tracking area list of the mobile terminal can be considered. In step ST1811, the serving cell receives the response signal Ack transmitted from the MME. In step ST1812, the serving cell transmits the received response signal Ack to the mobile terminal. In Step ST1813, the mobile terminal receives the response signal Ack from the MME transmitted via the serving cell.

  Next, “unicast side intermittent reception” described in the first embodiment will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. In Step ST1814, the MME confirms the tracking area list of the mobile terminal based on the identifier (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.) of the mobile terminal where paging has occurred. TA (Unicast) is searched in the tracking area list of the mobile terminal. As a specific example, the tracking area list of the mobile terminal is searched based on the UE-ID in the list as shown in FIG. When the mobile terminal is UE # 1 in FIG. 31A, TA (Unicast) includes # 1 and # 2. Next, the MME searches for the identifier (cell ID) of the base station included in TA (Unicast) in the list as shown in FIG. When the mobile terminal is UE # 1 in FIG. 31A, the cell IDs included in the tracking area list of the mobile terminal are cell IDs 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 23, 24, 25. It becomes. The MME transmits a paging request to a base station (including a serving cell) included in the tracking area list of the mobile terminal. Specific examples of parameters in the paging request include mobile terminal identifiers (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.). In step ST1815, the base station (including the serving cell) included in the tracking area list (TA (Unicast)) of the mobile terminal receives the paging request.

  Here, the third problem of the present invention will be described. Even in a mobile terminal in an idle state in an MBMS / unicast mixed cell, details of a notification method for a paging message have not been established. Non-Patent Document 1 discloses that PCH is mapped to PDSCH or PDCCH. Non-Patent Document 1 discloses that a paging group uses an L1 / L2 signaling channel (PDCCH), and a clear identifier (UE-ID) of a mobile terminal can be found on the PCH. On the other hand, there is no disclosure of how mobile terminals are divided into paging groups and how PCHs are notified for each paging group. There is no disclosure of how the mobile terminal performs intermittent reception in a standby state. It is an object of the present invention to disclose details of a method of notifying a paging signal to a mobile terminal in a standby state in a unicast and / or mixed frequency layer, and a mobile communication system therefor.

Therefore, a specific example of a paging signal notification method will be disclosed. Mobile terminals are divided into paging groups. In the conventional technique (W-CDMA system), the number of S-CCPCH (Secondary Common Control CHannel) to which PCH is mapped (number of channelization codes) is defined as the number of groups. However, since the LTE system is not a code division multiplexing (CDM) system, the concept of the number of channelization codes cannot be adapted. In Non-Patent Document 1 in the current 3GPP, it is disclosed that the paging group uses the L1 / L2 signaling channel (PDCCH), and the clear identifier (UE-ID) of the mobile terminal can be found on the PCH. Has been. However, no specific examples are disclosed. Calculation expression for determining a paging group and _{K Unicast} the (IMSI mod _{K Unicast)} is the number of paging groups in an MBMS / Unicast-mixed cell. As a specific example of the value of K, the L1 / L2 signaling channel (PDCCH) is mapped to each subframe. There are 10 subframes in one radio frame. Therefore, the number of paging groups is 10. That is, the paging group can identify which subframe in the radio frame is mapped with the paging information of the group to which it belongs. Next, to which radio frame the paging information of the group to which the user belongs is mapped, this can follow the conventional technique (W-CDMA). A specific calculation formula is “Paging Occasion = (IMSI div K _Unicast ) mod (intermittent reception period in unicast / mixed frequency layer) + n × (intermittent reception period in unicast / mixed frequency layer) n: 0, 1, 2 ... However, Paging Occussion ≦ maximum value of SFN ”. Here, SFN is an integer from 0 to the maximum value of SFN.

  Next, in the current 3GPP, Non-Patent Document 1 discloses that a clear identifier (UE-ID) of a mobile terminal can be found on the PCH. However, there is no disclosure about specific examples. As a specific example of the mapping method of specific paging information to the PCH, the PCH is configured with identification information of the mobile terminal, or is configured to be correlated by applying the identification information of the mobile terminal. . The PCH is mapped in units of CCE on the L1 / L2 signaling channel. In addition, it is assumed that the PCH includes allocation of downlink radio resources of a control channel to be received next by the mobile terminal. As a result, there is no need for downlink assignment again, and the effect that the control delay can be reduced can be obtained. A method of not transmitting the downlink radio resource assignment of the control channel to be received next by the mobile terminal on the PCH may be used. As this method, a paging indicator is put on the L1 / L2 signaling channel and transmitted, and the mobile terminal that has received the paging indicator addressed to itself transmits the uplink RACH to request the base station for radio assignment. You can think about how to keep it. PCH including a clear identifier (UE-ID) of the mobile terminal may be transmitted on the PDSCH. In this case, PDSCH radio resource allocation information to which the PCH to be received by the mobile terminal is mapped is mapped as a paging indicator on the L1 / L2 signaling channel. If the correlation is obtained by applying the identification information of the mobile terminal to the paging indicator, the mobile terminal can determine whether the paging indicator is addressed to itself. The mobile terminal that has received the paging indicator addressed to itself receives the identification information included in the PCH on the PDSCH based on the allocation information, and confirms whether or not the mobile terminal is the mobile terminal. By adopting such a method, it is possible to reliably detect whether the paging signal is addressed to the own mobile terminal, and it is possible to eliminate an erroneous reception operation.

  In step ST1816, the base station (including the serving cell) included in the tracking area list (TA (Unicast)) of the mobile terminal prepares for unicast-side intermittent reception. Specifically, the paging group and the paging occasion are calculated from the identifier of the mobile terminal received in step ST1815. Specific examples of the calculation formula are as described above. In step ST1817, the base station (including the serving cell) included in the tracking area list (TA (Unicast)) of the mobile terminal transmits the paging information of the mobile terminal according to the paging group and paging occurrence calculated in step ST1816. To map. At this time, any CCE is acceptable as long as it is a CCE in the L1 / L2 signaling channel in the subframe indicated by the paging group in the radio frame indicated by the Paging Occlusion. Or it maps to CCE where allocation to PCH was decided. When the allocation of the PCH is determined, the number of times that the mobile terminal performs blind detection is reduced, so that an effect that the control delay is reduced can be obtained. In step ST1818, the base station (including the serving cell) included in the TA list (TA (Unicast)) of the mobile terminal transmits the PCH.

  In Step ST1819, the user equipment moves to the unicast / mixed frequency layer by changing the set frequency of the frequency converter 1107 and changing the center frequency to f (unicast). In Step ST1820, the mobile terminal prepares for unicast side intermittent reception. Specifically, the paging group and the paging occasion are calculated from the identifier of the own mobile terminal. The calculation formula is the same as that described above on the network side. In step ST1821, the mobile terminal performs blind detection of the PCH on the L1 / L2 signaling channel according to the paging group calculated in step ST1820 and the Paging Occlusion. For blind detection, the identifier of the mobile terminal is used. The correlation value is obtained by multiplying the identifier of the mobile terminal by the CCE unit of the PCH. If the correlation value is greater than or equal to the threshold value, it is determined that there is paging to the own mobile terminal. In Step ST1822, the mobile terminal decodes the PCH and obtains downlink assignment for the next control channel. Control information is received according to the allocation.

  Next, in the current 3GPP, in a mixed cell, it is determined that in the MBSFN frame (subframe), except for the first 1 to 2 OFDM symbols in subframe units, it should not be used for unicast transmission. In other words, resources other than the first 1-2 OFDM symbols are dedicated to MBMS transmission. This is because the MBSFN frame is not assigned to subframes # 0 and # 5 and is a subframe to which the SCH is mapped. Here, the following problems occur. If the calculation formula of the paging group and the paging occasion is used, the paging signal may be generated every radio frame and every subframe. Since PCH uses an L1 / L2 signaling channel, it can be mapped even in an MBSFN frame. On the other hand, in the MBSFN frame, when the downlink radio resource of the next control information is allocated in the PCH, the downlink radio resource on the same subframe is dedicated to MBMS transmission. Therefore, the control information is allocated in the same subframe. The problem of not being able to do occurs. As a first solution, the downlink radio resource allocation of the next control information in PCH is a radio frame other than the subsequent MBSFN frame. As a second solution, a paging signal is assigned to one or a plurality of subframes excluding the MBSFN subframe. For example, the number of paging groups is made equal to or less than the number of subframes excluding the MBSFN subframe in the radio frame. This eliminates the need to assign a paging signal to the MBSFN subframe. As a specific example, it is assumed that the number of paging groups is 2, and the paging group calculation formula is “IMSI mod 2” as follows. As a specific group assignment example, if paging group = 0, subframe # 0 is assigned. If paging group = 1, subframe # 5 is allocated. As a result, it is possible to notify paging information only in subframes (# 0, # 5) to which no MBSFN frame is assigned, so that the next control information can be assigned in the same subframe as the paging signal. Can solve the problem of not.

As a third solution, a method of not transmitting the downlink radio resource assignment of the control channel to be received next by the mobile terminal by PCH. In this method, a paging indicator is put on the L1 / L2 signaling channel and transmitted, and the mobile terminal which has received the paging indicator addressed to itself transmits the uplink RACH to request the base station for radio assignment. To. In this way, since it is not necessary to put radio allocation information on the PDSCH for communication after paging, it is possible to transmit / receive a paging signal without any problem even if an MBSFN subframe exists. In this case, the mobile terminal identification information is applied so that the correlation can be obtained so that the mobile terminal can be specified only by the paging indicator. In the MBSFN subframe, a paging indicator may be placed in the area allocated for unicast and the first 1 or 2 OFDM symbol area. Similarly, in this case, the mobile terminal identification information is applied so that the correlation can be obtained so that the mobile terminal can be identified only by the paging indicator. The mobile terminal side receives a radio frame or subframe carrying the paging indicator of the group to which the mobile terminal belongs, derived from the mobile terminal's unique identification number, and performs blind detection using the mobile terminal's unique identification number. You can do it.
As specific paging group and paging occasion calculation formulas, the following formulas can be applied as described above.
IMSI mod K, K is the number of paging groups in a mixed MBMS / unicast cell.
Paging Occasion = (IMSI div K) mod (intermittent reception period in unicast / mixed frequency layer) + n × (intermittent reception period in unicast / mixed frequency layer) n: 0, 1, 2,... ≦ Maximum value of SFN. Where SFN is an integer from 0 to the maximum value of SFN.
By adopting such a method, even in the case of an MBMS / unicast mixed cell, a paging signal (paging indicator) can be transmitted in an arbitrary radio frame or subframe regardless of the presence or absence of the MBSFN subframe. It becomes possible.

  FIG. 24 shows the processing details of MBMS reception end B. In FIG. 24, step ST1823 to step ST1837 are the same as step ST1799 to step ST1813, and thus the description thereof is omitted. The difference is that “response to Paging” is included in step ST1828. By this MBMS reception end B processing, the network side can know that the mobile terminal ends the reception of the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer without adding an uplink to the MBMS dedicated cell. . Thereby, there is an effect that the network side can be changed from the MBMS reception time missing reception configuration to a configuration for notifying a normal paging signal. In the second embodiment, the case where the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission is configured by the MBMS dedicated cell has been described. Even if the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission is configured by an MBMS / unicast mixed cell, the second embodiment can be applied. In addition to the first embodiment, the third, fourth, fifth, and sixth embodiments described below are also applicable even if the MBMS transmission-dedicated frequency layer is configured with an MBMS / unicast mixed cell.

Embodiment 3 FIG.
In the current 3GPP discussion, the existence of an MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service Single Frequency Network) area that covers a plurality of MBSFN areas is discussed. A conceptual diagram of the geographical location of the base station when there is an MBSFN area covering a plurality of MBSFN areas is shown in FIG. There are four MBSFN areas 1 to 4 in one MBSFN synchronization area. The MBSFN area 4 covers the MBSFN areas 1 to 3. The content of MBSFN area 4 currently being discussed in 3GPP is that access to the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN area 4) is performed via the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN areas 1 to 3). That is, it is not determined whether the MCCH (multicast control channel) is provided in the MBSFN area 4 covering the MBSFN areas 1 to 3. In the case where the MCCH exists on the MBSFN area 4 side, the specific detailed operation has been described in the second embodiment. In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which there is no MCCH on the MBSFN area side to be covered. A conceptual diagram is shown in FIG. In the description, the description will focus on parts different from FIG. 29 referred to in the description of the second embodiment. Portions that are not particularly described are the same as in the second embodiment.

  First, as the first difference between FIG. 35 and FIG. 29, since MCCH does not exist on the MBSFN area 4 side shown in FIG. 28, the method of notifying control information (MCCH) is different from the second embodiment. As an MCCH mapping method for the MBSFN area 4, first, a method of securing the MBSFN areas 1 and 4 in the PMCH (PMCH1) of the covered MBSFN area (MBSFN area 1) can be considered. A conceptual diagram is shown in FIG. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a method for mapping a paging-related signal in a PMCH (PMCH1) to which a multicast control channel (MCCH1) is mapped in order to transmit control information to an MBSFN area including a plurality of MBSFN areas. . FIG. 36 (a) shows the configuration of a physical MCH (PMCH) provided with paging-related areas for MBSFN areas 1 and 4. It is assumed that MBMS-related information of MBSFN areas 1 and 4 and paging-related information of MBSFN areas 1 and 4 are included on the PMCH (PMCH1). The MBMS-related information and paging signal in each MBSFN area may exist as information elements in the MTCH and MCCH, respectively, or the physical area (resource) to which each is mapped may be time-division multiplexed. . FIG. 36 (b) shows a configuration in which MBSFN area 1 and 4 separate indicators indicating whether MCCH contents have been changed are provided in physical MCH (PMCH) in which MBSFN areas 1 and 4 are provided with paging areas. FIG. 36 (b) shows a case where the indicators have MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicators in MBSFN areas 1 and 4 and MBSFN areas 1 and 4 have paging presence / absence indicators. FIG. 36C shows a configuration in the case where the paging-related change presence / absence indicator is divided into K groups. If the MBSFN areas 1 and 4 are reserved in the PMCH (PMCH1) of the MBSFN area (MBSFN area 1) covered in this way, the scheduling of MCCH1 to be notified on BCCH1 (broadcast control channel) is MBSFN. The effect that only the one for area 1 is sufficient can be obtained. Details of the MCCH scheduling method are the same as those in the second embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  An MCCH scheduling method will be described. In addition to the scheduling of MCCH1 notified by BCCH1, the starting point of the physical area where MCCH4 is carried may be notified. Alternatively, the scheduling notified by BCCH1 may be PMCH1 scheduling.

  The second difference is that there is no MCCH on the overlying MBSFN area (MBSFN area 4) side, and therefore a method of notifying the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the MBSFN area 4 is a method for notifying the paging signal. Is different. The difference in the method for notifying the paging signal will be described. First, a method is conceivable in which the network side notifies all the MBSFN areas 1 to 3 covered by the MBSFN area 4 as the notification range of the paging signal to the mobile terminal. In this case, the case where there is no MCCH in the MBSFN area 4 can be realized without adding any additional control to the specific method described in the second embodiment. This is an effective method in terms of avoiding complexity as a mobile communication system.

  Next, a method is conceivable in which the network side notifies the covered MBSFN area (any of MBSFN areas 1 to 3) where the mobile terminal is located as a notification range of the paging signal to the mobile terminal. A specific operation will be described focusing on differences from the second embodiment. The “MBMS side reception status notification” will be described. In Step ST1742 of FIG. 20, the mobile terminal transmits an “MBMS side reception status notification” to the serving cell according to the UL (Uplink) allocation received in Step ST1741. Examples of parameters included in the “MBMS side reception status notification” include mobile terminal identifiers (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.), MBMS service reception frequency (f (MBMS)), MBSFN area number (ID )and so on. Here, the MBSFN area ID to be notified is not the MBSFN area ID (MBSFN area 4) that actually receives the MBMS service (MTCH) but the covered MBSFN area ID where the mobile terminal is located. In other words, the MBSFN area ID mapped to the S-SCH (second synchronization channel) received during the MBSFN search is notified. Thereby, the network side can know the covered MBSFN area where the mobile terminal is actually located. Further, as a process of the mobile terminal, step ST3101 in FIG. 38 is performed before the process in step ST1794 in FIG.

  In step ST3101 of FIG. 38, the mobile terminal measures the reception quality of the MCCH being received. The mobile terminal receives the reference signal (RS) with the radio resource in the MBSFN area and measures the received power (RSRP). It is determined whether or not the received power is equal to or greater than a threshold value determined statically or semi-statically. If the threshold is equal to or greater than the threshold, it indicates that the sensitivity is sufficient for receiving the MCCH, and if the threshold is less than the threshold, it indicates that the sensitivity for receiving the MCCH is not satisfied. If it is equal to or greater than the threshold, the process proceeds to step ST1794, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold, the process proceeds to step ST1724. Thereby, the mobile terminal grasps the mobility between the covered MBSFN areas to which the MCCH is mapped. Thus, the following points are effective compared to the method of notifying the paging signal from all the MBSFN areas 1 to 3 covered by the MBSFN area 4. As a mobile communication system, a paging signal is transmitted from a base station other than the base station that can be received geographically by the mobile terminal (for example, when the mobile terminal is located in MBSFN area 1, MBSFN areas 2 and 3). This eliminates the need to do so, and is effective in terms of effective use of radio resources.

  According to the third embodiment, even when there is no MCCH in an MBSFN area including a plurality of MBSFN areas, the paging signal is sent to the mobile terminal that is receiving the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell, which is the first problem of the present invention. The effect of being able to be notified is produced. In addition, a method for selecting a desired service in an MBMS transmission dedicated cell, which is a fourth problem of the present invention, can be disclosed, whereby a mobile terminal can perform a desired operation in an MBMS transmission dedicated cell without an uplink. There is an effect that the service can be received.

Embodiment 4 FIG.
The methods described in the first to third embodiments are paging signal notification methods when the paging reception capability (capability) of a mobile terminal receiving an MBMS service in an MBMS transmission dedicated cell is low. Next, a paging signal notification method in the case where there are a mobile terminal having a high paging reception capability (high capability terminal) and a mobile terminal having a low paging reception capability (low capability terminal) will be described. As a specific example of the “low-capacity terminal” described in the following description, there is a mobile terminal having one receiver. Alternatively, the mobile terminal has one central frequency that can be determined by changing the set frequency of the frequency conversion unit 1107. Alternatively, it is a mobile terminal that cannot perform intermittent reception of the MBMS / unicast mixed cell when receiving the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell.

  A specific example of the “high-capacity terminal” is a mobile terminal provided with a plurality of (for example, two) receivers of the mobile terminal. Alternatively, the mobile terminal has a plurality of center frequencies that can be determined by changing the set frequency of the frequency conversion unit 1107. Alternatively, the mobile terminal can perform intermittent reception in the MBMS / unicast mixed cell even when the MBMS service is being received in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell. FIG. 38 is a table showing the concept of mobile terminal capabilities. The capability (Capability) of the mobile terminal is notified from the mobile terminal to the serving base station in Step ST1710, and is notified from the serving base station to the MME in Step ST1712. As a result, the network side can recognize the paging reception capability of the mobile terminal. Therefore, it is possible to switch the paging method for the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission depending on the paging reception capability of the mobile terminal.

  A specific operation example will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17. The high-capacity terminal performs an MBMS / unicast mixed cell reception operation and an MBMS transmission dedicated cell reception operation in parallel. Specific examples of the MBMS transmission dedicated cell receiving operation include step ST1601-1, step ST1602, step ST1603, step ST1604, and step ST1609. Detailed operations in each step are the same as those in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted. The low-capacity terminal performs the operation described in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment. By this method, while establishing a paging signal notification method to a low capability terminal receiving an MBMS service in an MBMS transmission dedicated cell, the paging signal for the high capability terminal receiving the MBMS service in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell is established. The notification method can be configured to notify a normal paging signal. Thereby, it is possible to simplify the processing in the mobile terminal and the processing as the mobile communication system when the high-capacity terminal receives the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. The simplification of the process can achieve the effect of reducing the power consumption of the mobile terminal. Moreover, since it is not necessary for a mobile communication system to transmit a paging signal from a base station in the MBSFN area to a high-capacity terminal, the effect of effective use of radio resources can be obtained.

  Furthermore, even in the case of a high-capacity terminal, an embodiment is performed at the user's intention to prevent an increase in power consumption due to parallel reception of MBMS / unicast mixed cells and reception of MBMS transmission dedicated cells. 1. The operation described in the second and third embodiments is performed. Thereby, even if it is a high capability terminal, it becomes unnecessary to perform reception operation | movement in parallel and the effect of preventing the increase in the power consumption of a mobile terminal can be acquired. The intention of this user is notified from the mobile terminal to the network side in step ST1710 as with the mobile terminal paging reception capability, and the processing is the same as that of the second embodiment as a mobile communication system including the mobile terminal.

Embodiment 5 FIG.
The method described in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment is a method for notifying a paging signal to a mobile terminal that receives an MBMS service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. In the fifth embodiment, “no paging is received” can be selected by the user's intention while receiving the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. A specific operation example when “do not receive paging” is selected by the user's intention will be described with reference to FIGS. The mobile terminal that has selected “do not receive paging” at the user's will notifies “not receive paging” in step ST1603, specifically, the MBMS side reception status notification in step ST1742. As a mobile terminal, step ST1605, step ST1608, step ST1610, and step ST1611 are not performed. By simplifying the processing of the mobile terminal, an effect of reducing the power consumption of the mobile terminal can be obtained. In step ST1745, the mobile communication system receives “no paging received” from the mobile terminal. In step ST1746, the fact that “paging notification is stopped” for the mobile terminal is stored in the TA list of the mobile terminal or separately. Thereafter, in step ST1773, paging for the mobile terminal occurs. In Step ST1774, the MME confirms the tracking area list of the mobile terminal based on the identifier (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.) of the mobile terminal where paging has occurred. Then, the MME confirms “paging notification stop” for the mobile terminal.

  As the mobile communication system, the paging generation processing in steps ST1775 to ST1783 and steps ST1814 to ST1818 is stopped. Then, the MME notifies the mobile terminal of “paging reception refusal” of the mobile terminal. Thereby, the paging generation process as a mobile communication system can be stopped for a mobile terminal that does not receive paging at the user's will. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load and radio resources of the mobile communication system used for the notification of the paging signal that the mobile terminal does not intend to receive.

Embodiment 6 FIG.
In the first to fourth embodiments, even when a paging signal addressed to the own mobile terminal in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission is received, the MBMS / unicast mixed cell is configured to perform intermittent reception again ( Hereinafter, this is referred to as two-stage intermittent reception.) In principle, the base station in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell and the base station in the mixed MBMS / unicast cell are asynchronous. Therefore, radio resource allocation for downlink control signals after the paging signal of the base station in the MBMS / unicast mixed cell cannot be performed from the base station of the MBMS transmission dedicated cell. However, the two-step intermittent reception has a problem that the control delay becomes larger compared to a configuration in which a normal paging signal is notified to a mobile terminal other than the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. . A specific operation example will be described with reference to FIG. In step ST1705, the unicast cell or the mixed cell notifies two types of intermittent reception periods using BCCH. Specifically, it is for two-stage intermittent reception and for normal intermittent reception. More specifically, the length of two intermittent receptions is set to be equal to or shorter than that for normal intermittent reception for two-stage intermittent reception. The intermittent reception cycle for two-stage intermittent reception may indicate continuous reception. As a result, even when a paging signal addressed to the mobile terminal in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission is received, even when intermittent reception is performed again in the MBMS / unicast mixed cell, the cycle is shortened. Therefore, the effect that the control delay can be reduced can be obtained.

Embodiment 7 FIG.
In LTE, it is considered that a new MBMS dedicated cell is provided. In the MBMS dedicated cell, a unicast service for performing individual communication addressed to individual terminals is not performed. Therefore, it is difficult to directly apply a method executed in a W-CDMA system that can execute both MBMS and a unicast service in an MBMS dedicated cell, for example, as defined in the Release 6 standard of 3GPP. In order for the mobile terminal to receive paging from the MBMS dedicated cell, it is necessary to provide a new paging channel. The present invention provides a method for a mobile terminal that is receiving or is about to receive an MBMS service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission to receive a paging signal from an MBMS dedicated cell. Also disclosed are a channel configuration and mapping method for transmitting a paging signal, and a mobile communication system therefor.

  Hereinafter, a method for placing a paging signal on a physical multicast channel (PMCH) will be disclosed. FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration of a physical multicast channel provided for each MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network) area. In FIG. 39, a PMCH to which a multicast control channel (Multicast control channel: MCCH) that is a downlink logical channel and a multicast traffic channel (Multicast Traffic channel: MTCH) are mapped is time-division multiplexed (Time Division) for each MBSFN area 1 to 3. Multiplexing (TDM). In FIG. 39, cell # n1 is a cell in MBSFN area 1, cell # n2 is a cell in MBSFN area 2, and cell # n3 is a cell in MBSFN area 3. Since the cell of the cell # n1 belongs to the MBSFN area 1, the PMCH corresponding to the MBSFN area is transmitted at a certain time. Since PMCH is transmitted in multiple cells (Multi Cell: MC) in the MBSFN area, it is transmitted on the MBSFN subframe. A set of MBSFN frames to which MBSFN subframes are allocated is referred to as an “MBSFN frame cluster” (MBSFN frame cluster). In the MBMS dedicated cell, all subframes in the MBSFN frame may be MBSFN subframes used for multicell transmission. A cycle in which the MBSFN frame cluster is repeated is referred to as an “MBSFN frame cluster repetition period”.

  The MCH of one or a plurality of MBMS transport channels is mapped to the PMCH, and either or both of the MCCH, which is a logical channel of MBMS control information, and the MTCH, which is a logical channel of MBMS data, are mapped to the MCH. To be mapped. MCCH and MTCH may be temporally divided and mapped onto PMCH, or may be further temporally divided and mapped to a physical region that is transmitted in multicell. For example, MBSFN subframes, which are physical areas to which MTCH and MCCH are mapped, may be different. MCCH may be mapped on each MBSFN frame cluster, or only MTCH may be mapped. When only MTCH is mapped onto PMCH, the MCCH repetition period is different from the MBSFN frame cluster repetition period. In some cases, a plurality of MCCHs are mapped on the MBSFN frame cluster. The MCCH repetition period is referred to as an “MCCH repetition period”. In FIG. 39, MCCH1 is MBMS control information for MBSFN area 1, and MTCH1 is MBMS data for MBSFN area 1. Cell # n2 belongs to MBSFN area 2, MCCH2 is MBMS control information for MBSFN area 2, and MTCH2 is MBMS data for MBSFN area 2. Cell # n3 belongs to MBSFN area 3. MCCH3 is MBMS control information for MBSFN area 3, and MTCH3 is MBMS data for MBSFN area 3. The MCCH repetition period may be different for each MBSFN area. The PMCH for each MBSFN area is time-division multiplexed. Therefore, cell orthogonality between MBSFN areas can be obtained in the MBSFN synchronization area (MBSFN Synchronization Area FIG. 7) in which synchronization between cells is ensured, and interference from cells in other MBSFN areas can be prevented. it can. Since multi-cell transmission is performed in the MBSFN area, cells in each MBSFN area transmit the same data on the same PMCH. Even if one cell belongs to a plurality of MBSFN areas and a plurality of cells are overlapped, the PMCH for each MBSFN area is time-division multiplexed and transmitted on the MBSFN subframe. It is possible to apply while maintaining the orthogonality.

  In a mobile terminal, MBMS can be received by receiving PMCH transmitted in multiple cells from a plurality of cells in the MBSFN area in which the mobile terminal exists, and reception quality is improved by SFN gain by multi-cell transmission. Even when one cell belongs to a plurality of MBSFN areas, the mobile terminal can receive a plurality of MBMS services by receiving the PMCH of each MBSFN area. In addition, since a mobile terminal receiving a PMCH in a desired MBSFN area does not need to receive a PMCH other than the PMCH, discontinuous reception (DRX) can be performed for a time other than the PMCH, which is consumed. Electric power can be reduced. By transmitting the PMCH continuously for each MBSFN area and making the MBSFN frame an MBSFN frame cluster, the mobile terminal can continuously perform the intermittent reception operation, which can further reduce power consumption. It becomes possible.

  FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration of a physical multicast channel provided for each MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network) area. In FIG. 39, the PMCH is time division multiplexed (TDM) for each of the MBSFN areas 1 to 3. FIG. 40 shows a case where PMCH is code division multiplexed (CDM) for each of MBSFN areas 1 to 3. Cell # n1 is a cell in MBSFN area 1, cell # n2 is a cell in MBSFN area 2, and cell # n3 is a cell in MBSFN area 3. The PMCH corresponding to MBSFN area 1 is transmitted in the cell of cell # n1. Here, the PMCH may be continuous in time or discontinuous. In the case of discontinuity, the cycle in which the MBSFN frame cluster in which the PMCH corresponding to the MBSFN area is transmitted is repeated becomes an “MBSFN frame cluster repetition period” (MBSFN frame cluster repetition period). In addition, the MBSFN frame cluster repetition period in the case of continuous may be 0 or may not be specified. MCCH and MTCH may be temporally divided and mapped onto PMCH, or may be further temporally divided and mapped to a physical region that is transmitted in multicell. For example, MBSFN subframes that are physical areas to which MTCH and MCCH are mapped as a result may be different. The cycle in which the MCCH is repeated is referred to as “MCCH repetition period” (MCCH Repetition period). Similarly, a PMCH corresponding to MBSFN area 2 is transmitted in the cell of cell # n2, and a PMCH corresponding to MBSFN area 3 is transmitted in the cell of cell # n3. The MCCH repetition period may be different for each MBSFN area. Since the data multiplied by the spreading code specific to the MBSFN area is mapped to the PMCH for each MBSFN area, interference between MBSFN areas can be suppressed in the MBSFN synchronization area in which synchronization between cells is ensured. Since multi-cell transmission is used in the MBSFN area, cells in each MBSFN area transmit the same data on the same PMCH, that is, data multiplied by a spreading code (Scrambling Code) unique to the MBSFN area. Even if one cell belongs to a plurality of MBSFN areas, the PMCH configuration can be applied while suppressing interference between the MBSFN areas.

  The mobile terminal receives the PMCH transmitted from the plurality of cells in the MBSFN area in which the mobile terminal is present, and despreads it with a spreading code unique to the MBSFN area, thereby affecting the influence of interference from other MBSFN areas. MBMS can be received while removing reception, and the reception quality can be improved by the SFN gain by multi-cell transmission. Even when one cell belongs to a plurality of MBSFN areas, the mobile terminal receives a PMCH of each MBSFN area and receives a plurality of MBMS services by despreading with a spreading code specific to each MBSFN area. It is possible. In addition, when the PMCH in a desired MBSFN area is not continuous in time, the mobile terminal does not need to receive the time other than the PMCH, and therefore, the intermittent reception operation can be performed for the time other than the PMCH, thereby reducing power consumption. It becomes. Even if the PMCH is continuous in time, if there are a plurality of services mapped to the PMCH and the services are temporally multiplexed on the PMCH, the mobile terminal transmits the desired service mapped to the PMCH. Only the time domain in the PMCH needs to be received, and other time domains need not be received. Therefore, the intermittent reception operation can be performed at other times in the PMCH, and the power consumption can be reduced.

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of a physical multicast channel (PMCH) carrying a paging signal. FIG. 41 shows the configuration of a physical multicast channel (PMCH) carrying a paging signal. FIG. 41 (a) is a diagram showing a PMCH provided with a paging signal area, which shows that MBMS related information and a paging signal are included on the PMCH. The MBMS related information and the paging signal may exist as information elements in the MTCH and MCCH, respectively, or a physical area (resource) to which each is mapped may be time-division multiplexed. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing a mapping method in a case where MBMS related information and a paging signal are carried as information elements on a multicast control channel (MCCH). Of the MBMS related information, MBMS control information is put on the logical channel MCCH together with the paging signal. MCCH is mapped to a multicast channel (MCH) that is a transport channel together with MTCH, and MCH is mapped to a physical multicast channel (PMCH) that is a physical channel. In this way, it is possible to receive a paging signal when a mobile terminal receiving or trying to receive the MBMS service receives the MCCH.

  Another example will be described. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing a mapping method when the logical channel PCCH is multiplexed with the logical channels MTCH and MCCH and placed on the transport channel MCH. In FIG. 57, the paging signal is carried on the logical channel PCCH, and the MBMS related information is carried on the MTCH and MCCH. The base station may provide an MTCH-only MBSFN subframe and an MBSFN subframe in which MCCH and PCCH are mapped. Further, control may be performed so as to provide an MCS-only MBSFN subframe and a PCCH-only MBSFN subframe. By doing so, MTCH, MCCH and PCCH, and further, MCCH and PCCH can be transmitted after being divided in time. The mobile terminal only needs to receive the MBSFN subframes of necessary information, and can perform the DRX operation during the MBSFN subframes of unnecessary information. Further, MBSFN subframes carrying MCCH and PCCH may be temporally adjacent. For example, the base station performs scheduling so that an MBSFN subframe on which the PCCH is carried is continuously formed after (or before) the MBSFN subframe on which the MCCH is carried. Since a mobile terminal that is receiving or intending to receive MBMS receives MCCH, MCCH and PCCH reception timing can be known from the MCCH repetition period by making MCCH and PCCH continuous. Therefore, it is possible to continuously receive the paging signal when the mobile terminal receiving or trying to receive the MBMS service receives the MCCH. Also, since no MTCH is inserted between the MCCH and the PCCH, a terminal that has not received the MTCH can receive the PCCH without shifting to the DRX operation. As yet another example, FIG. 58 shows a method using MCH and PCH. FIG. 58 shows a mapping method when the logical channel PCCH is placed on the transport channel PCH, the logical channels MTCH and MCCH are multiplexed and placed on the transport channel MCH, and the PCH and MCH are multiplexed and placed on the physical multicast channel. It is explanatory drawing shown. In FIG. 58, a paging signal is carried on PCCH, and this PCCH is mapped to transport channel PCH. This PCH is multiplexed with MCH and mapped to PMCH. In this way, the base station can transmit the PCH and MCH by dividing them in time, and further can perform encoding separately. Therefore, the mobile terminal can perform decoding separately at the time of reception.

  All cells in a certain MBSFN area periodically perform multi-cell transmission in the MCCH repetition period with the MCCH corresponding to the MBSFN area on the PMCH. A mobile terminal that is receiving or intending to receive an MBMS service transmitted from a cell in the MBSFN area periodically receives the MCCH, and receives the contents of the MBMS service, the frame configuration, etc. Enable service reception. Therefore, by including a paging signal in the MCCH as disclosed in FIG. 56, a mobile terminal receiving or attempting to receive an MBMS service can receive the paging signal when receiving the MCCH. it can. This eliminates the need for the mobile terminal to separately receive paging at a timing other than receiving the MCCH, and thus enables paging to be received without interrupting reception of the MBMS service. In addition, intermittent reception operation can be performed during the time when the MCCH is not received and the time when the MBMS service is not received, and the power consumption of the mobile terminal can be reduced.

  In the case of the mapping method disclosed in FIG. 57, MCCH and PCCH may be configured in the same MBSFN subframe, or an MBSFN subframe in which MCCH is carried and an MBSFN subframe in which a paging signal is carried are temporally arranged. It may be divided and further adjacent. As a feature of the present invention, there is “so that PCCH can be seen when viewing MCCH”. Therefore, when MCCH and PCCH are in the same MBSFN subframe, it is sufficient to receive the subframe. However, if the MBSFN subframe on which MCCH is carried and the subframe on which PCCH is carried are time-divided, they should be adjacent to each other. Is preferred. In the case of the mapping method disclosed in FIG. 58, the MBSFN subframe carrying the MCCH and the MBSFN subframe carrying the paging signal may be temporally adjacent. For example, the base station performs scheduling so that an MBSFN subframe on which the PCCH is carried is continuously formed after (or before) the MBSFN subframe on which the MCCH is carried. With this configuration, it is possible to continuously receive a paging signal when a mobile terminal that is receiving or intending to receive an MBMS service receives an MCCH. This eliminates the need for the mobile terminal to receive a separate paging signal at a timing other than the reception of subframes carrying MCCH and PCCH, thereby enabling the paging signal to be received without interrupting the reception of the MBMS service. In addition, intermittent reception operation can be performed during the time when the MCCH is not received and the time when the MBMS service is not received, and the power consumption of the mobile terminal can be reduced.

  FIG. 41B discloses a configuration in which an indicator indicating whether MBMS control information has been changed and an indicator indicating whether a paging signal has been transmitted are provided. Either of these indicators may be provided, or both of them may be provided. An indicator indicating whether the MBMS control information has been changed is referred to as an “MBMS related information change presence / absence indicator”, and an indicator indicating whether a paging signal has been transmitted is referred to as a “paging signal presence indicator”. The physical area to which the indicator is mapped may be provided in an MBSFN subframe in which the PMCH is transmitted, or may be provided in a physical area temporally adjacent to the MBSFN subframe in which the PMCH is transmitted. By doing so, the mobile terminal can receive and decode the MCCH and the paging signal on the PMCH immediately after receiving the indicator. For example, 1-bit information is used as an indicator. Each indicator is multiplied by a spreading code specific to the MBSFN area and mapped to a predetermined physical area. As another method, for example, each indicator may be composed of a sequence specific to the MBSFN area and may be mapped to a predetermined physical area. When there is an incoming call to the mobile terminal, the paging signal presence indicator is set to “1”, and when there is no incoming call, the paging signal presence indicator is set to “0”. For example, when the MBMS control information on the MCCH is changed due to the change of the content of the MBMS service transmitted in the MBSFN area, the change presence / absence indicator of the MBMS related information is set to “1”. A period (MBMS modification period) in which MBMS related information can be changed is determined, and a change presence / absence indicator “1” is repeatedly transmitted within the period. The period (MBMS modification period), start timing (SFN, starting point), and the like may be determined in advance, or may be notified by broadcast information from a serving cell in a unicast service or from an MBMS dedicated cell. If there is no further change in the MBMS related information after the period has elapsed, the MBMS related information change presence / absence indicator is set to “0”.

  The mobile terminal receives the indicator in the MBSFN subframe in which the PMCH of the desired MBSFN area is transmitted in multi-cell or the adjacent MBSFN subframe, performs despreading, etc., and determines whether the indicator is 1 or 0, thereby It is possible to determine whether there has been a change in the MBMS control information existing in the, and whether there is a paging signal. By providing the indicator in this manner, when there is no change in the MBMS control information or when there is no paging signal, the mobile terminal does not need to receive or / and decode the entire PMCH information. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the reception power of the mobile terminal. The physical area to which the MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicator indicating whether the MBMS control information has been changed may be the first MBSFN subframe of one or more MBSFN subframes to which the MBMS control information is mapped. Furthermore, it may be an OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) symbol at the beginning of the first MBSFN subframe. Accordingly, the mobile terminal can determine whether the MBMS control information has changed by receiving the first OFDM symbol.

  Further, a physical area to which a paging signal presence / absence indicator indicating whether or not a paging signal is present may be used as the first MBSFN subframe of one or a plurality of MBSFN subframes to which the paging signal is mapped. Further, it may be the first OFDM symbol of the first MBSFN subframe. As a result, the mobile terminal can determine whether a paging signal exists by receiving the first OFDM symbol. By mapping each indicator to the physical area as described above, when there is no MBMS control signal change, when there is no paging information, it is not necessary to receive or / and decode each subsequent OFDM symbol. It is possible to reduce received power. In addition, since it can be determined early with the first MBSFN subframe or the first OFDM symbol, the MBMS control information can be received immediately or the paging signal can be received immediately. Control delay can be reduced. As an indicator, the MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicator and the paging signal presence / absence indicator may be mapped to the same physical area, or may be mapped to different physical areas. When mapping to the same physical area, an OR operation of each indicator may be taken. As a result, since the mobile terminal needs only one indicator to receive, the effect of simplifying the receiving circuit configuration can be obtained. In the case of mapping to different physical areas, this allows the mobile terminal to receive only the necessary indicators and eliminates the need to receive other indicators. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the reception power of the mobile terminal and further reduce the reception delay of necessary information. For example, a mobile terminal that has received an MBMS service but is set not to receive a paging signal need only receive an MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicator, and eliminates the need to receive a paging signal presence / absence indicator. Can do. The repetition period of each indicator may be the same or different. The repetition period of each indicator may be the same as or different from the repetition period of MCCH. For example, an MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicator may be provided on the PMCH on which the MCCH is carried once every several times.

  The indicator repetition periods are a paging signal presence / absence indicator repetition period (Repetition period) and an MBMS-related change presence / absence indicator repetition period (Repetition period), respectively. The start timing (SFN, starting point) of the MBSFN subframe in which the indicator exists, the subframe number, the repetition period of each indicator, etc. may be notified by the broadcast information of the serving cell of the unicast service, or the broadcast of the MBMS dedicated cell It may be notified by information or may be determined in advance. The channel dedicated to the MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicator may be, for example, a MICH (MBMS Indicating CHannel), and a paging signal presence / absence indicator may be configured in the MICH. The repetition period of the paging signal presence / absence indicator may be the same as or different from the MICH repetition period (MICH Repitition period). The notification of the indicator can be performed by the same method described above. Thereby, the time when each indicator is transmitted is not limited to the time when MCCH is transmitted, and the system can be designed flexibly.

  When the paging signal is included in the PMCH, there is a problem that it takes too much time to detect the paging signal addressed to the own mobile terminal when the number of mobile terminals that have received calls becomes enormous. Further, there arises a problem that an area for mapping paging signals of all mobile terminals that have received incoming calls cannot be secured in a predetermined physical area carrying a paging signal. In order to solve these problems, a paging grouping method is disclosed. FIG. 41 (c) shows a paging grouping method. All mobile terminals are divided into K groups, and a paging signal presence / absence indicator is provided for each group. The physical area for the paging signal presence / absence indicator is divided into K pieces, and the paging signal presence / absence indicator of each group is mapped to each of the divided physical areas. Here, K can take from 1 to the value of the total number of mobile terminals. When an incoming call is received at a certain mobile terminal, the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the group to which the mobile terminal belongs is set to “1”. When all mobile terminals belonging to a certain group do not receive an incoming call, the paging signal presence / absence indicator of that group is set to “0”. The paging signal presence / absence indicator may be subjected to repetition or the like in order to satisfy a desired reception error rate at the mobile terminal. The physical area to which the paging signal is mapped is also divided into K pieces so as to correspond to the K groups. The paging signal may be an identifier (identification number, identification code) for each mobile terminal. One physical area divided into K is a physical area in which paging signal data required by one mobile terminal is accommodated by adding the number of mobile terminals in the group. The number of mobile terminals in a group may be the same in all groups, or may be different for each group. For example, the number of mobile terminals in the group may be an average value of the number of mobile terminals that simultaneously receive incoming calls. Alternatively, the number of mobile terminals that can be assigned to one OFDM symbol may be used, and each OFDM symbol may be associated with each group. When an incoming call is received at a certain mobile terminal, the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the group to which the mobile terminal belongs is set to “1” and mapped to the paging signal presence / absence indicator physical area corresponding to the group. At the same time, the paging signal for the mobile terminal that has received the incoming call is mapped to the physical area of the paging signal corresponding to the group to which the mobile terminal belongs. The mapping of the paging signal to the physical area is performed by multiplying each mobile terminal by an identification code unique to the mobile terminal. When the paging signal is an identifier for each mobile terminal, the control for multiplying the mobile terminal specific identification code can be omitted.

  The mobile terminal receives the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the group to which the mobile terminal belongs to determine whether an incoming call has been made to the group to which the mobile terminal belongs. When it is determined that an incoming call is received, a physical area to which a paging signal associated with a group to which the mobile terminal belongs is received and decoded (Decode). After decoding processing, blind detection is performed by performing a correlation operation with an identification code unique to the mobile terminal, and it is possible to determine that there is an incoming call to the mobile terminal by specifying a paging signal for the mobile terminal. It becomes. If no paging signal for the mobile terminal is detected, it is determined that there is no incoming call to the mobile terminal. By grouping the mobile terminals into K groups, the mobile terminal does not need to receive the entire paging signal area, and only receives the necessary area, that is, only the physical area to which the group to which the mobile terminal belongs corresponds. Therefore, the paging signal detection time at the mobile terminal can be shortened, and further, it is not necessary to receive the corresponding physical area of the group to which the mobile terminal does not belong, so that the reception power of the mobile terminal can be reduced. Furthermore, by using a paging signal presence / absence indicator corresponding to each group, a paging signal presence / absence indicator can be provided with few physical resources even when there are a large number of mobile terminals. Furthermore, the mobile terminal only needs to receive the paging signal area as needed, and it is possible to reduce the reception power of the mobile terminal, and when it is not necessary to receive the paging signal, the mobile terminal immediately moves to the next operation. Therefore, the control delay can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, one physical area divided into K pieces for mapping the paging signal is obtained by adding the physical area in which the paging signal data required by one mobile terminal is accommodated by the number of mobile terminals in the group. It was in the physical area. However, when the number of mobile terminals increases, the required physical area increases, and the overhead for transmitting the MBMS service increases, so the transmission speed of MBMS service data decreases. In order to prevent this, the paging signal for the mobile terminal is multiplied by an identification code unique to the mobile terminal for each mobile terminal. As a result, the mobile terminal can blindly detect whether the information is addressed to its own mobile terminal using an identification code unique to the mobile terminal, so that the physical area for mapping the paging signal for each mobile terminal is fixed in advance. There is no need to keep it. Therefore, a physical area for paging signals for all mobile terminals is not required, and it is sufficient if there is an area for the number of mobile terminals that are expected to actually receive incoming calls. As an example, there is a method in which the number of mobile terminals in the group is an average value of the number of mobile terminals that receive incoming calls simultaneously. This method makes it possible to effectively use limited physical resources. In addition, by using the above method, even when the number of mobile terminals receiving more than expected is increased, it becomes possible to transmit a paging signal to a new incoming mobile terminal on the next PMCH, etc. It becomes possible to respond flexibly by scheduling at the base station.

  When the total number of mobile terminals is small, only the paging signal presence / absence indicator may be transmitted with the value of K as the total number of mobile terminals. In this case, it is not necessary to secure a paging-related physical area, and it is sufficient to secure physical areas for paging signal presence / absence indicators for the number of all mobile terminals. For this reason, the efficiency of radio resources can be improved. In this case, there is a physical area for a paging signal presence / absence indicator corresponding to each mobile terminal. For this reason, in the mobile terminal, it is possible to determine the presence / absence of an incoming call without receiving the paging signal area only by receiving and decoding the physical area for the paging signal presence / absence indicator corresponding to the mobile terminal. The control delay in the paging operation can be reduced.

  FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing a method of mapping a paging signal to an area on the physical multicast channel. In FIG. 42, the paging signals for the mobile terminals n1, n2, etc. that have received an incoming call such as a voice call among the mobile terminals belonging to the paging group n are mapped to the physical area for the group n. The base station multiplies the paging signal of each mobile terminal by an identification code (number, sequence) unique to the mobile terminal, adds CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check), and performs processing such as encoding (encode) and rate matching . The result of performing a series of these processes is assigned to each control information element (CCE: Control Channel Element) corresponding to the size of the physical area to be mapped, and connected to each mobile terminal where an incoming call has occurred. The concatenated result is subjected to spreading processing, modulation processing, etc. using a MBSFN area-specific spreading code (Scrambling code). The modulation process may be specific to the MBSFN area. The result of performing these processes is mapped to the physical area corresponding to the paging group n. At this time, the base station sets “1” to the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the paging group n and maps it to the physical area of the paging group n of the paging signal presence / absence indicator.

  The physical area corresponding to the paging group n may be determined in advance, or may be notified as broadcast information from the unicast-side serving cell or the MBMS dedicated cell. The mobile terminal receives the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the paging group to which the mobile terminal belongs, and if it is “1”, receives the paging signal physical area corresponding to the paging group. The paging signal physical area is received, demodulated, and despread by a spreading code unique to the MBSFN area, and the result is divided into control information element units. A process such as decoding (Decode) is performed for each divided control information element unit, and a correlation calculation is performed using an identification number unique to the mobile terminal, thereby blindly detecting a paging signal for the mobile terminal. If the correlation calculation result is greater than a certain threshold, it is determined that there is paging for the mobile terminal, and a paging incoming operation is started by a paging signal. If it is less than a certain threshold value, it is determined that there is no paging for the terminal itself, and the process shifts to reception of MBMS related information, or shifts to the intermittent reception operation if it is not necessary to receive MBMS related information. Which group the own mobile terminal belongs to may be derived by a predetermined calculation method, or may be notified from a higher layer as a broadcast information from a serving cell or MBMS dedicated cell of unicast service.

  FIG. 43 shows another example of a method for mapping a paging signal to a physical area carrying a paging signal on the PMCH. Of the mobile terminals belonging to the paging group n, the paging signal is mapped to the physical area for the group n for the mobile terminals n1, n2, etc. that are receiving calls. The base station adds CRC to the paging signal of each mobile terminal and performs processing such as encoding and rate matching. The results of these processes are multiplied by an identification code (number) unique to the mobile terminal. The orthogonality is obtained between the mobile terminals by using an identification code unique to the mobile terminal as a spreading code having orthogonality. The base station multiplexes the result of multiplying the spreading code for each mobile terminal that is receiving an incoming call. The multiplexed result is subjected to spreading processing, modulation processing, etc. using a spreading code unique to the MBSFN area. The modulation process may be specific to the MBSFN area. The result of performing these processes is mapped to the physical area corresponding to the paging group n. At this time, the base station sets “1” to the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the paging group n and maps it to the physical area of the paging group n of the paging signal presence / absence indicator. The physical area corresponding to the paging group n may be determined in advance or may be notified from the unicast-side serving cell or the MBMS dedicated cell as broadcast information. The mobile terminal receives the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the paging group to which the mobile terminal belongs, and if it is “1”, receives the paging signal physical area corresponding to the paging group. The paging signal physical area is received, demodulated, and despread by a spreading code unique to the MBSFN area. By performing a correlation operation on the result using an identification number unique to the mobile terminal, a paging signal for the mobile terminal is blind-detected. When the correlation calculation result is larger than a certain threshold, it is determined that there is paging for the mobile terminal, and the paging incoming operation is started by the paging signal after decoding. If it is less than a certain threshold value, it is determined that there is no paging for the terminal itself, and the process shifts to reception of MBMS related information, or shifts to the intermittent reception operation if it is not necessary to receive MBMS related information. Which group the own mobile terminal belongs to may be derived by a predetermined calculation method, or may be notified from a higher layer as a broadcast information from a serving cell or MBMS dedicated cell of unicast service. Note that the paging signal described in FIGS. 42 and 14 may be a transport channel to which the paging signal is mapped. This can be applied to the following embodiments. Any information that carries a paging signal, which is paging-related information required when the mobile terminal receives paging, may be used.

  Several methods for mapping the paging signal to the physical area carrying the paging signal of the PMCH have been disclosed. However, the mapping to the physical area carrying the paging signal may be any predetermined area or localized. It may be mapped to (physical region continuous on the frequency axis) or may be mapped to distributed (physical region distributed on the frequency axis).

  In the above example, the paging signal is multiplied by an identification number or spreading code unique to the mobile terminal. By adopting such a configuration, when the information amount of the paging signal is the same in each mobile terminal, the control information element unit to be allocated by making the processing such as encoding (encode) and rate matching the same between the mobile terminals It is possible to make the sizes of the regions of the same. Therefore, since the size of the area of the control information element unit for blind detection in the mobile terminal is limited to one, the number of blind detections can be reduced and the detection time can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an effect that the circuit configuration of the mobile terminal, power consumption, and control delay can be reduced.

  As described above, the mobile terminal receives the entire paging signal area by multiplying the paging signal by the identification number or spreading code unique to the mobile terminal and mapping it to the physical area where the PMCH paging signal is carried for each paging group. Since it is only necessary to receive only the necessary area, that is, only the physical area corresponding to the group to which the mobile terminal belongs, the paging signal detection time at the mobile terminal can be shortened, and the time mobile terminal does not belong Since it is not necessary to receive the physical area corresponding to the group, the reception power of the mobile terminal can be reduced. Furthermore, a paging signal presence / absence indicator corresponding to each group can be used, and even when there are a large number of mobile terminals, the paging signal presence / absence indicator can be provided with few physical resources. Furthermore, the mobile terminal only needs to receive the paging signal area as needed, and it is possible to reduce the reception power of the mobile terminal, and when it is not necessary to receive the paging signal, the mobile terminal immediately moves to the next operation. Therefore, the control delay can be reduced. Furthermore, since the mobile terminal can blindly detect whether the information is addressed to the mobile terminal by using an identification code or a spreading code unique to the mobile terminal, a physical area for mapping a paging signal for each mobile terminal Since there is no need to have a fixed paging signal area for all mobile terminals, there is no need for a physical area for paging signals for all mobile terminals, and there is only an area for the number of mobile terminals that are expected to actually receive calls. It is possible to effectively use physical resources. Furthermore, even if the number of mobile terminals that receive more than expected is increased, a paging signal to a new incoming mobile terminal can be transmitted on the PMCH carrying the next MCCH. It is possible to respond flexibly by scheduling.

  In the above example, the base station multiplies the paging signal by the identification number unique to the mobile terminal. However, it is also possible to use a method of multiplying CRC instead of a paging signal by an identification number unique to the mobile terminal. The method of multiplying the CRC by the identification number unique to the mobile terminal is effective when the information amount of the paging signal of each mobile terminal is different.

  By adopting the method of placing a paging signal on the PMCH disclosed in the seventh embodiment, the paging signal of all the mobile terminals that are receiving or intending to receive the MBMS service from the MBMS dedicated cell as the mobile communication system And the mobile terminal can receive the paging signal from the MBMS dedicated cell.

  Hereinafter, modifications of the seventh embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, a method of placing a paging signal on the PMCH for each MBSFN area in order to receive the paging signal from the MBMS dedicated cell has been disclosed. As a configuration of the PMCH, a method of time division multiplexing (TDM) for each MBSFN area and code division multiplexing (CDM) for each MBSFN area has been disclosed. In a first modification described below, a method of mixing time division multiplexing (TDM) and code division multiplexing (CDM) for each MBSFN area is disclosed as the PMCH configuration.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the PMCH provided for each MBSFN area. In FIG. 44, both time division multiplexing (TDM) and code division multiplexing (CDM) are used for each MBSFN area. Cell # n1 is a cell in MBSFN area 1, cell # n2 is a cell in MBSFN area 2, and cell # n3 is a cell in MBSFN area 3. The cells of cell # 1, cell # 2, and cell # 3 are also cells in the MBSFN area 4. The PMCHs of MBSFN areas 1, 2, and 3 are code division multiplexed, and the PMCHs of MBSFN areas 1, 2, and 3 and the PMCH of MBSFN area 4 are time division multiplexed. Since the cell of the cell # n1 belongs to the MBSFN area 1, the PMCH corresponding to the MBSFN area 1 is transmitted at a certain time. Since PMCH is transmitted by multicell in the MBSFN area, it is transmitted on the MBSFN subframe. A set of MBSFN frames to which MBSFN subframes are allocated is referred to as an “MBSFN frame cluster” (MBSFN frame cluster). In the MBMS dedicated cell, all subframes in the MBSFN frame may be MBSFN subframes used for multicell transmission. A period in which an MBSFN frame cluster corresponding to an MBSFN area is repeated is referred to as an “MBSFN frame cluster repetition period”. The MBCH transport channel MCH is mapped to the PMCH, and either or both of the logical channel MCCH of the MBMS control information and the logical channel MTCH of the MBMS data are mapped to the MCH.

  MCCH and MTCH may be temporally divided and mapped onto PMCH, or may be further temporally divided and mapped to a physical region that is transmitted in multicell. For example, MBSFN subframes that are physical areas to which MTCH and MCCH are mapped as a result may be different. MCCH may be mapped on each MBSFN frame cluster or only MTCH. When only MTCH exists, the MCCH repetition period is different from the MBSFN frame cluster repetition period. In some cases, a plurality of MCCHs are mapped on the MBSFN frame cluster. The MCCH repetition period is referred to as an “MCCH repetition period”. In FIG. 44, MCCH1 is MBMS control information for MBSFN area 1, and MTCH1 is MBMS data for MBSFN area 1. Similarly, MCCH2 is MBMS control information for MBSFN area 2, MTCH2 is MBMS data for MBSFN area 2, MCCH3 is MBMS control information for MBSFN area 3, and MTCH3 is MBMS data for MBSFN area 3. The PMCHs of cell # n1, cell # n2, and cell # n3 are code division multiplexed and transmitted at the same timing. Since the cells of cell # n1 (cell # n2, cell # n3) belong to MBSFN area 1 (2, 3) and MBSFN area 4, the PMCH of MBSFN area 1 (2, 3) and the PMCH of MBSFN area 4 are time-shared. Is multiplexed. Since the PMCH in the MBSFN area 4 is transmitted by multi-cell transmission in the MBSFN area 4, the PMCH transmission timings are all the same in the cells # n1, # n2, and # n3. As described above, by mixing the PMCH for each MBSFN area with time division multiplexing and code division multiplexing, for example, time division multiplexing is performed for MBSFN areas that overlap between MBSFN areas, and code division multiplexing is performed for non-overlapping MBSFN areas. Can be used. Therefore, since code division multiplexing is used as compared with the case of only time division multiplexing, the efficiency of radio resources can be improved. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce mutual interference between overlapping MBSFN areas as compared with the case of only code division multiplexing, and it is possible to reduce reception errors of MBMS data at the mobile terminal.

  Next, the configuration of each PMCH for the mobile terminal to receive paging from the MBMS dedicated cell will be described. Time division multiplexing and code division multiplexing are mixed for each MBSFN area. Accordingly, there are a plurality of PMCHs for each MBSFN area transmitted from each cell. Thus, in order to cope with the case where there are a plurality of PMCHs for each MBSFN area in a certain cell, a paging signal is placed on the PMCHs corresponding to all MBSFN areas. A method of including a paging signal as shown in FIG. 41 can be applied to the PMCH in each MBSFN area. With this configuration, a mobile terminal in an area capable of receiving MBMS services in a plurality of MBSFN areas receives the MCCH of any one MBSFN area that is receiving or is about to receive the MBMS service. Thus, paging can be received when the MCCH is received. The mobile terminal does not need to receive MCCH in an MBSFN area different from the MBMS service being received, and intermittent reception is possible, so that power consumption can be reduced. As another method, a configuration on the PMCH of one MBSFN area will be described. For example, MCCH (P-MCCH) is mapped only to the PMCH of the smallest MBSFN area to which a certain cell belongs, and the MCCH is not mapped to the PMCH of other MBSFN areas, and the PMCH of the smallest MBSFN area is mapped. Applies a method of putting a paging signal as shown in FIG. The MBMS control information of other MBSFN areas is included in the MCCH (P-MCCH) mapped to the PMCH of the smallest MBSFN area.

  By adopting such a configuration, for example, even if the mobile terminal receives the MBMS service of any MBSFN area, the MCCH (P-MCCH) of the smallest MBSFN area is received. Paging can be received when receiving (P-MCCH). Furthermore, the mobile terminal does not need to change the paging reception period, here, the MCCH repetition period (MCCH repetition period) in accordance with the change of the MBMS service to be received, and can simplify the control. Furthermore, since only MTCH can be mapped to PMCHs in other MBSFN areas, an effect that the efficiency of radio resources can be achieved as a system is obtained. As another method, the MCCH corresponding to another MBSFN area may be mapped to the PMCH of the smallest MBSFN area. In this case as well, a method of putting a paging signal as shown in FIG. 41 can be applied to the PMCH. Thereby, the same effect can be obtained, and each MCCH can be time-divided and mapped to the physical area. Therefore, the mobile terminal can receive the MCCH of a desired MBSFN area, and can receive intermittently the other physical area in which the MCCH is transmitted. As still another method, a configuration for placing on the PMCH of one MBSFN area will be described. For example, the primary MCCH (P-MCCH) is mapped to the PMCH in the MBSFN area to which a certain cell belongs, and the secondary MCCH (S-MCCH) is mapped to the PMCH in the other MBSFN area. A method of including a paging signal as shown in FIG. With such a configuration, for example, even if a mobile terminal receives an MBMS service in any of a plurality of MBSFN areas, by receiving the P-MCCH, paging is performed when the P-MCCH is received. It becomes possible to receive. Furthermore, the mobile terminal does not need to change the paging reception period, here, the MCCH repetition period (MCCH repetition period) in accordance with the change of the MBMS service to be received, and can simplify the control. The method disclosed in FIG. 42 and FIG. 43 can be applied to the method for mapping the paging signal to the physical area carrying the paging signal on the PMCH.

  In the seventh embodiment and the modification, the case where there are a plurality of cells in the MBSFN area is shown. However, the present invention is applicable even if there is only one cell in the MBSFN area. In the one cell, it is possible to apply the method of mapping the paging signal disclosed in FIG. 42 to the physical area carrying the paging signal on the PMCH, with the configuration of the PMCH disclosed in FIG. In the case of only one cell, even though transmission using PMCH is not possible to obtain the SFN gain associated with normal multi-cell transmission, the MBMS service can be limited to a narrow area, and so-called spot service can be provided. Become. Further, there may be only one cell in the MBSFN area, and the MBMS service data corresponding to the MBSFN area is not transmitted in the one cell, and only the MBMS control information is transmitted. In this case, only the MCCH is mapped without mapping the MTCH on the PMCH. The MCCH may include MBMS control information (MCCH) of another MBSFN area to which the one cell belongs. This eliminates the need to map each MCCH to PMCHs in other MBSFN areas, thereby improving the efficiency of radio resources. Furthermore, since the mobile terminal can receive only the MCCH corresponding to the MBSFN area, it can receive all the MCCHs of one or a plurality of receivable MBSFN areas without receiving other PMCHs. Control delay time when receiving the MBMS service can be reduced. Furthermore, when it is not necessary to receive MBMS service information of other MBSFN areas, an intermittent reception operation is possible, and reception power can be reduced.

Embodiment 8 FIG.
Since the mobile terminal receives paging from an MBMS dedicated cell that does not support unicast service, in the first embodiment, paging is performed on a physical multicast channel (PMCH) for each MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network) area. A method for placing a signal has been disclosed. In the eighth embodiment, a method for providing a paging dedicated physical channel for multi-cell transmission in the MBSFN area and placing a paging signal on the physical channel is disclosed.

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration of a paging-dedicated physical channel that is transmitted by multicell in the MBSFN area. In a certain cell, a part of the MBSFN subframe corresponding to the MBSFN area to which the cell belongs is defined as a dedicated physical channel (DPCH) for paging, and a DPCH is provided for each subframe. As shown in the first embodiment, since the unicast service is not supported in the MBMS dedicated channel, all subframes of the MBSFN frame may be MBSFN subframes. As an example, FIG. 59 shows a method of mapping a paging signal to a physical channel dedicated to paging. FIG. 59 shows a mapping method when the logical channel PCCH including the paging signal is put on the transport channel PCH, the logical channels MTCH and MCCH are multiplexed and put on the transport channel MCH, and the PCH is put on the physical channel dedicated to paging. It is explanatory drawing shown. The logical channel PCCH carrying the paging signal is mapped to the transport channel PCH and mapped to the DPCH, which is a physical channel dedicated to paging. On the other hand, as usual, MBMS related information is carried on logical channels MTCH and MCCH, which are mapped to transport channel MCH and mapped to physical channel PMCH. The DPCH is configured to be transmitted by multicell in the MBSFN area, and DPCH and PMCH are multiplexed and transmitted in the same MBSFN subframe.

  When the PMCH configuration for each MBSFN area is, for example, code division multiplexed as shown in FIG. 40, the PMCH is transmitted in consecutive MBSFN subframes. In this case, DPCH can be provided in all subframes on the time axis. Therefore, compared with Embodiment 1, the frequency | count that a paging signal can be transmitted increases. In this way, a part of each subframe of the MBSFN subframe transmitted in multi-cells in the MBSFN area is used as a DPCH for transmitting a paging signal, so that the frequency of transmission of the paging signal is increased as a system, so The number of mobile terminals that enable paging can be increased. Furthermore, when paging to a mobile terminal capable of paging can be avoided, a shortage of paging area can be avoided, so that the paging information transmission delay time can be shortened. The above example describes the case where the PMCH configuration for each MBSFN area is code division multiplexing (CDM). However, in the case of time division multiplexing (TDM) or when both time division multiplexing and code division multiplexing are applied, a certain cell is used. The DPCH may be provided in all MBSFN subframes to which PMCHs corresponding to one or a plurality of MBSFN areas to which the UE belongs are transmitted. Thereby, compared with Embodiment 1, since the frequency | count that a paging signal can be transmitted can be increased, the same effect can be acquired.

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the MBSFN subframe. In FIG. 46, DPCH and PMCH are time-division multiplexed in the MBSFN subframe. A paging signal is mapped to DPCH, and MBMS related information is mapped to PMCH. By separating the physical channels to which each is mapped, the paging signal and the MBMS-related information can be encoded separately in the base station, and decoding can be performed separately in reception at the mobile station. In addition, the physical area can be time division multiplexed, the mobile terminal that has not received the MBMS service and has received only the paging information does not need to receive the PMCH, while the PMCH is being transmitted. Is capable of discontinuous reception, thereby reducing the power consumption of the mobile terminal. On the other hand, mobile terminals that do not need to receive paging information do not need to receive DPCH, and can perform intermittent reception operations while DPCH is transmitted, thereby reducing power consumption of the mobile terminal. It becomes possible. The DPCH is transmitted in kOFDM symbols of each MBSFN subframe. The value of k may be determined in advance or may be notified by broadcast information of the MBMS dedicated cell. Moreover, you may notify by the alerting | reporting information of a unicast cell.

  A PCFICH (Physical control format indicator channel) may be provided for each subframe as a channel indicating the value of the number of OFDM symbols k to which DPCH is transmitted. PCFICH is transmitted in the first OFDM symbol of each subframe. Notification of allocation information of physical resources of PCFICH to the mobile terminal may be notified by broadcast information of the MBMS dedicated cell, or by notification related to the frequency layer information of the MBMS dedicated cell by broadcast information of the unicast cell. Also good. Moreover, you may decide beforehand. By determining in advance, the amount of information required for notification can be reduced. Thus, by indicating the value of k for each subframe, the value of k can be changed for each subframe, and the MBMS information transmission area and the DPCH transmission area can be dynamically changed. Become. The value of k can take from 0 to the maximum number of OFDM symbols in one subframe. For example, it may be the same 1 to 3 OFDM symbols as PDCCH (Physical downlink control channel) of a unicast cell. In this case, PCFICH is 2 bits. Also, for example, the same 1-2 OFDM symbols as the PDCCH in the MBSFN subframe of the MBMS / unicast mixed cell may be used. In this case, PCFICH is 2 bits or 1 bit. The PCFICH of a unicast cell is multiplied by a cell-specific scrambling code. However, in the present invention, the PCFICH is also multiplied by a scrambling code specific to the MBSFN area in order to enable multi-cell transmission within the MBSFN area. With the configuration as described above, the mobile terminal can perform decoding (Decode) in the same manner as the unicast cell, and the reception circuit of the mobile terminal can be simplified.

  In a unicast cell, PDSCH or PDCCH is used to transmit a paging signal, but it is necessary to include radio allocation (Resource Allocation) information in the paging signal. This is because radio allocation for communication after paging is necessary. Resources for communication after paging are transmitted using PDSCH. The PDSCH is transmitted in the remaining OFDM symbol region excluding the OFDM symbol region for transmitting the PDCCH in the subframe. In the paging method according to the present invention, since communication after paging is performed by a unicast cell, only paging indicator (Paging Indicator: PI) for notifying whether there is an incoming call may be used as paging information transmitted by DPCH. This is because it is not necessary to transmit radio assignment information for communication after paging. In order to be able to specify a mobile terminal only with a paging indicator, an MBSFN frame or an MBSFN subframe in which a paging indicator for a certain mobile terminal exists can be uniquely calculated from an identification number (ID) unique to the mobile terminal. It ’s fine. As another method, the base station may multiply the paging indicator by an identification number unique to the mobile terminal, and the mobile terminal may perform blind detection using the identification number unique to the mobile terminal. Furthermore, the above two methods may be combined. For example, the mobile terminals are grouped by an identification number (ID) unique to the mobile terminal, and an MBSFN frame or an MBSFN subframe in which a paging indicator exists for the group is uniquely associated with the group, and The station multiplies the paging indicator by an identification number unique to the mobile terminal.

  On the mobile terminal side, MBSFN frames and MBSFN subframes carrying the paging indicator of the group to which the mobile terminal belongs derived from the mobile terminal specific identification number are received, and blind detection is performed using the mobile terminal specific identification number You may do it. The method for deriving the MBSFN frame or MBSFN subframe in which the paging indicator of the mobile terminal or group exists from the identification number unique to the mobile terminal may be determined in advance, or may be notified by the broadcast information of the MBMS dedicated cell from the higher layer. It is good and you may notify by the alerting | reporting information of a unicast cell. MBSFN frames and MBSFN subframes in which a paging indicator is present may be periodically present. Since it is not necessary to transmit the radio allocation information, it is possible to configure the DPCH with a small amount of information, and it is possible to transmit the MBMS related information in the remaining area in the same subframe. Instead of mapping the paging indicator to the PCCH as shown in FIG. 59, the paging indicator may be directly mapped to the PDCH in the physical layer. It is also possible to transmit DPCH using all OFDM symbols in the subframe. For example, when the number of OFDM symbols in a subframe is 7 at maximum, an arbitrary OFDM symbol from k = 0 to 7 can be used for DPCH transmission by setting the PCFICH to 3 bits and indicating the value of k. Can do. Thus, the MBMS information transmission area and the DPCH transmission area can be flexibly changed and combined in units of subframes, and the efficiency of radio resources can be improved.

  In the present invention, the case of an MBMS dedicated cell has been described. However, in the case of an MBMS / unicast mixed cell, both unicast and MBMS services are possible. Therefore, in paging in the case of an MBMS / unicast mixed cell, Requires radio assignment for post-paging communication. However, since MBMS can be executed in an MBMS / unicast mixed cell, there is an MBSFN subframe for transmitting MC data for broadcast-type MBMS. Since there is no PDSCH in the MBSFN subframe, when the paging method in the unicast cell is applied in the MBMS / unicast mixed cell, an area for mapping the radio allocation information addressed to the individual mobile terminal cannot be secured in the MBSFN subframe. The problem arises. In this case, a method of limiting a subframe in which a paging indicator is transmitted in advance to a subframe in which a PDSCH exists, or a method of transmitting allocation information in a PDCCH of a subframe in which the first PDSCH after the paging signal is transmitted exists. By taking this, it is possible to enable paging in the MBMS / unicast mixed cell.

  In the case of paging in the case of an MBMS / unicast mixed cell, when it is not necessary to put radio allocation information on the PDSCH for communication after paging, a method is adopted in which a mobile terminal can be identified only by the paging indicator. Is possible. In this case, a paging indicator may be placed on the PDCCH area. In the MBSFN subframe, a paging indicator may be placed in the area allocated for unicast and the first 1 or 2 OFDM symbol area. As a specific method thereof, the method using the paging dedicated channel (DPCH) can be applied. For the number of symbols to be used, the method using the PCFICH can be applied, and k = 0, 1 may be used. The mobile terminal receives a radio frame or a subframe carrying a paging indicator of a group to which the mobile terminal belongs, derived from the mobile terminal's unique identification number, and performs blind detection using the mobile terminal's unique identification number. You can do it. In the case of paging in the case of an MBMS / unicast mixed cell, there is no need to put radio allocation information on the PDSCH for post-page communication, for example, after the mobile terminal receives the paging indicator, A method of transmitting an uplink RACH to make a request is conceivable. In this way, the base station does not need to put the radio allocation information on the PDSCH of the same subframe with the paging indicator. By adopting such a method, even in the case of an MBMS / unicast mixed cell, a paging signal (paging indicator) can be transmitted in any radio frame and subframe regardless of the presence or absence of the MBSFN subframe. It becomes possible.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing a method of mapping a paging signal to a paging dedicated channel (DPCH). FIG. 47 shows only a paging indicator (Paging Indicator: PI) as a paging signal. The paging indicator is paging information expressed by 1 bit of 1 to 0, and indicates whether there is an incoming call. The base station sets “1” to the paging indicator for the mobile terminal receiving the incoming call and maps it to the paging dedicated physical channel. The base station multiplies the paging indicator for each mobile terminal m receiving the incoming call by an identification number unique to the mobile terminal. Next, CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is added to the multiplication result, and encoding (Coding) processing such as encoding (Encode), rate matching, and interleaving is performed. The result of performing this series of processing is assigned to each control information element unit corresponding to the size of the physical area to be mapped, and connected to each mobile terminal that is receiving an incoming call. The connected result is subjected to spreading processing, modulation processing, and the like using a spreading code (Scrambling Code) unique to the MBSFN area. The modulation process may be specific to the MBSFN area. The results of these processes are mapped from the beginning into kOFDM symbols. At that time, the base station derives the required number of OFDM symbols k based on the result of connection for each mobile terminal that has received an incoming call, and performs processing such as encoding on the indicator corresponding to the k. , Map to PCFICH. These are performed by the same method in all cells in the MBSFN area, and multicell transmission is performed in the MBSFN area. In the present embodiment, the number of OFDM symbols (k) for transmitting DPCH is set to 1. DPCH is mapped to the first OFDM symbol of the subframe together with PCFICH and reference symbols.

  In a mobile terminal receiving a signal transmitted by multicell transmission, the number of OFDM symbols used for paging is determined based on the received PCFICH decoding result, and demodulation processing, despreading processing, etc. are performed. After these processes, the image is divided into certain areas, sequentially subjected to deinterleaving, decoding (decoding), error detection, correction processing, and the like, and blind detection is performed using a terminal-specific identification number. When the identification number of the mobile terminal is detected by blind detection, it can be determined that paging has occurred. For PCFICH, reference symbols, etc., mapping to physical resources is performed by a predetermined method, for example. You may use the method similar to a unicast cell. By using the same method as the unicast cell, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the base station and the configuration of the receiving circuit of the mobile terminal. When the mobile terminal has the same amount of information as in the case where the paging signal is only the paging indicator, the size of the control information element unit for allocating the coding result may be one. By making the encoding process etc. the same in all mobile terminals that receive paging, the size of the control information element after encoding can be made one. As a result, when a mobile terminal performs blind detection of an identification number unique to the mobile terminal, it suffices to perform processing such as decoding for each control information element unit of one size, thereby reducing the time for blind detection. And the detection speed can be increased. Further, instead of multiplying the identification number unique to the mobile terminal, a code unique to each mobile terminal may be used as a paging indicator, and an equivalent effect can be obtained.

  FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram showing a method of mapping a paging signal to a paging dedicated channel (DPCH). FIG. 48 shows only the paging indicator (PI) as a paging signal. The paging indicator is paging information represented by 1 bit of 1/0, and indicates whether there is an incoming call. The base station sets “1” in the paging indicator for the mobile terminal receiving the incoming call and maps it to the paging dedicated physical channel. The base station adds CRC to the paging signal of each mobile terminal, and performs processing such as encoding (encode), rate matching, and interleaving. The result of performing these processes is multiplied by an identification code (number) unique to the mobile terminal. The orthogonality is obtained between the mobile terminals by using an identification code unique to the mobile terminal as a spreading code having orthogonality. The base station multiplexes the result of multiplying the spreading code for each mobile terminal that is receiving an incoming call. The multiplexed result is subjected to spreading processing, modulation processing, etc. using a spreading code (Scrambling Code) unique to the MBSFN area. The modulation process may be specific to the MBSFN area. The results of these processes are mapped from the beginning into kOFDM symbols. When the number of mobile terminals is large, it is divided into a plurality of groups, multiplied by a mobile terminal identification code so as to obtain orthogonality among the mobile terminals in the group, and multiplexed for the mobile terminal, and an MBSFN area specific spreading code Performs diffusion processing, modulation processing, and the like. These processes may be performed for each group and then mapped to different OFDM symbols. At that time, the base station derives the required number of OFDM symbols k based on the result of multiplexing each mobile terminal receiving the incoming call, performs an encoding process or the like on the indicator corresponding to the k, and PCFICH To map. These are performed by the same method in all cells in the MBSFN area, and multicell transmission is performed in the MBSFN area. In the present embodiment, the number of OFDM symbols (k) for transmitting DPCH is set to 1. DPCH is mapped to the first OFDM symbol of the subframe along with PCFICH, reference symbols, and the like. In a mobile terminal receiving a signal transmitted by multi-cell transmission, the number of OFDM symbols used for paging is determined from the received physical resource based on the PCFICH decoding result, and demodulation processing, descrambling processing, and the like are performed. After these processes, the image is divided into certain areas, a correlation calculation is performed using a terminal-specific identification number, and blind detection is performed. When the identification code of the own mobile terminal is detected by blind detection, it can be determined that paging has occurred, and a paging signal is received by performing deinterleaving, decoding, error detection, correction processing, and the like.

  Although several methods for mapping the paging signal to the paging dedicated channel (DPCH) have been disclosed, the mapping to the paging dedicated channel region may be any predetermined region or localized (continuous on the frequency axis). May be mapped to a distributed physical area (distributed on the frequency axis).

  This embodiment may be applied not only to the case where the PMCH configuration for each MBSFN area is code division multiplexed, but also to the case where time division multiplexing and both time division multiplexing and code division multiplexing are applied.

  In the mobile terminal, it is necessary to know at which timing the paging signal for the mobile terminal is mapped on the DPCH of the MBSFN frame or the MBSFN subframe, but as a method therefor, it may be derived by a predetermined calculation method. Alternatively, it may be notified from the upper layer as broadcast information from the serving cell of the unicast service or the MBMS dedicated cell. The timing may be periodic. When the paging signal is transmitted at a certain period, the mobile terminal can perform an intermittent reception operation when the MBMS service is not received during the time when the paging signal is not transmitted. Therefore, the power consumption of the mobile terminal can be reduced.

  Since the mobile terminal can blindly detect whether the information is addressed to the mobile terminal by using an identification code or a spreading code unique to the mobile terminal, the physical area for mapping the paging signal for each mobile terminal is fixed in advance. There is no need to have a physical area for paging signals for all mobile terminals, and there is only an area for the number of mobile terminals that are expected to actually receive incoming calls. It can be used effectively. In the above example, the base station multiplies the paging signal by the identification number unique to the mobile terminal. However, it is also possible to use a method of multiplying CRC instead of a paging signal by an identification number unique to the mobile terminal. The method of multiplying the CRC by the identification number unique to the mobile terminal is effective when the information amount of the paging signal of each mobile terminal is different.

  In the case of the method of placing a paging signal on the PMCH for each MBSFN area disclosed in the first embodiment, the frequency of the PMCH on which the paging signal can be carried decreases with time. Therefore, there arises a problem that paging signals for many or all mobile terminals must be mapped to one PMCH carrying the paging signal. In order to solve this problem, the first embodiment disclosed a method such as paging grouping. In the eighth embodiment, the above-mentioned problem can be solved by providing a paging-dedicated physical channel for multi-cell transmission in the MBSFN area and placing a paging signal on the physical channel. In addition, since the mobile communication system can transmit a paging signal of a mobile terminal that is receiving or is about to receive an MBMS service from the MBMS dedicated cell, the mobile terminal can receive the paging signal in the MBMS dedicated cell. Become.

  In the example of the present embodiment, in a certain cell, a part of the MBSFN subframe corresponding to the MBSFN area to which the cell belongs is set as a physical channel dedicated to paging (referred to as DPCH), and the DPCH is provided for each subframe. However, it may be transmitted periodically instead of every subframe. For example, a part of the MBSFN subframe corresponding to each MBSFN area may be transmitted as a paging-dedicated physical channel (referred to as DPCH) once every two subframes or once per radio frame. Depending on the number of mobile terminals considered in the system, the repetition period of transmission as DPCH of each MBSFN area may be determined based on the number of mobile terminals that can simultaneously transmit paging and the frequency of paging. As a result, a subframe in which no DPCH is transmitted can be used as an MBMS service data area, and the speed of the MBMS service can be increased.

Embodiment 9 FIG.
In the eighth embodiment, a method for providing a paging-dedicated physical channel for multi-cell transmission in an MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network) area and placing a paging signal on the physical channel has been disclosed. In the following, Embodiment 9 discloses a method of providing a physical channel for multi-cell transmission in the MBSFN synchronization area and placing a paging signal on the physical channel.

  FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration of a physical channel (referred to as main PMCH) transmitted in multi-cells within the MBSFN synchronization area. This shows a case where time division multiplexing and code division multiplexing are mixed as PMCH provided for each MBSFN area. Cell # n1 is a cell in MBSFN area 1, cell # n2 is a cell in MBSFN area 2, and cell # n3 is a cell in MBSFN area 3. The cells # n1, # n2, and # n3 are also cells in the MBSFN area 4. The PMCHs in MBSFN areas 1, 2, and 3 are code division multiplexed, and the PMCHs in MBSFN areas 1, 2, and 3 and the PMCH in MBSFN area 4 are time division multiplexed. The main PMCH is time-division multiplexed with the PMCH for each MBSFN area. Since cell # n1 belongs to MBSFN area 1 and MBSFN area 4, PMCH1 and PMCH4 are time-division multiplexed, and the main PMCH is time-division multiplexed. The same applies to cell # 2 and cell # 3. Since the main PMCH is transmitted by multicell in the MBSFN synchronization area, it is transmitted on an MBSFN subframe in which SFN combining is performed. A set of MBSFN frames to which MBSFN subframes are allocated is defined as an MBSFN frame cluster. In the MBMS dedicated cell, all subframes in the MBSFN frame may be MBSFN subframes used for multicell transmission. A period in which the main PMCH is repeated is referred to as a “main PMCH repetition period”. MCH, which is a transport channel for MBMS, is mapped to the main PMCH. MCCH, which is a logical channel for transmitting MBMS control information, and MTCH, which is a logical channel for transmitting MBMS data, or both are mapped to MCH. MCCH and MTCH may be divided in time and mapped onto the main PMCH, or may be divided in time and mapped to a physical region that is transmitted in multicell.

  For example, MBSFN subframes that are physical areas to which MTCH and MCCH are mapped as a result may be different. MCCH may be mapped to each MBSFN frame cluster in which the main PMCH is transmitted, or only MTCH may be mapped. When only MTCH exists, the MCCH repetition period is different from the main PMCH repetition period. In some cases, a plurality of MCCHs are mapped on the MBSFN frame cluster in which the main PMCH is transmitted. The MCCH repetition period is referred to as “MCCH repetition period”. In FIG. 49, MCCH1 (MCCH2,3,4) is MBMS control information for MBSFN area 1 (MBSFN areas 2,3,4), and MTCH1 (MTCH2,3,4) is MBSFN area 1 (MBSFN areas 2,3, 4) Transmit MBMS data. Each MCCH may be mapped on each PMCH, or only MTCH. When only the MTCH exists, the MCCH of each MBSFN area may be mapped to the main PMCH. Further, it may be included as an information element of MCCH mapped to the main PMCH. Since the main PMCH is transmitted by multicell in the MBSFN synchronization area, it is impossible to multiply the main PMCH by a spreading code (Scrambling Code) unique to the MBSFN area as in the PMCH of each MBSFN area. This is because the main PMCH is transmitted from the cells of different MBSFN areas at the same timing, and therefore when the main PMCH is multiplied by a spreading code specific to the MBSFN area, the mobile terminal receiver transmits the main PMCH transmitted from each MBSFN area. This is because the phase of the main PMCH becomes random and SFN synthesis cannot be performed. Therefore, as shown above, the main PMCH and the PMCH of each MBSFN area can be time-division multiplexed to multiply each MBSFN area-specific spreading code in units of subframes, and only the main PMCH. It is possible not to multiply the spreading code unique to each MBSFN area. As a result, the main PMCH can be transmitted in a multi-cell manner in the MBSFN synchronization area, and the mobile terminal can receive the main PMCH regardless of which MBMS service is received in the MBSFN synchronization area. In addition, an SFN gain can be obtained. In the main PMCH, it has been described that a unique spreading code is not multiplied. However, any spreading code unique to the MBSFN synchronization area may be used. In this case, interference from other cells in the MBSFN synchronization area can be suppressed, and reception errors of the MBMS service in the mobile terminal can be reduced.

  FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration of a radio frame in which the main PMCH is transmitted. In FIG. 50, subframes in which the main PMCH is transmitted are subframes # k1 to # k2 excluding # 0 and # 5 (k1 to k2 ≠ 1, 5). In an MBMS dedicated cell, it is considered that a synchronization channel (SCH) is transmitted in subframes # 0 and # 5 in one radio frame. Also, it is considered that a broadcast channel (BCH) is transmitted in the # 0 subframe. It is considered that the synchronization channel (SCH) includes a cell-specific sequence or MBSFN area-specific sequence, and the broadcast channel (BCH) is multiplied by a cell-specific spreading code or MBSFN area-specific spreading code. Therefore, by setting the subframe in which the main PMCH is transmitted as a subframe excluding # 0 and # 5, multi-cell transmission can be performed in the MBSFN synchronization area. Even if the MBMS service is received or about to be received, the main PMCH can be received, and further, an SFN gain can be obtained. In the figure, the subframes in which the main PMCH is transmitted are continuous, but may not be continuous. By making it continuous in subframes excluding # 0 and # 5, it becomes possible for the mobile terminal to perform intermittent reception during other subframe periods that do not require reception, thereby reducing received power. The main PMCH may not be provided every radio frame, and may be provided periodically, for example, every 2 radio frames or every 10 radio frames. The period of the main PMCH is represented by a “Main PMCH repetition period”. As a result, the PMCH of the subframe that does not transmit the main PMCH can be used as the MBMS service data area, and the speed of the MBMS service can be increased. The start timing (SFN, starting point) of the radio frame and subframe in which the main PMCH exists, the subframe number, and the main PMCH repetition period may be notified by broadcast information of the unicast-side serving cell, or broadcast information of the MBMS dedicated cell You may be notified by. It may be determined in advance. Since the main PMCH is transmitted in multicell, the subframe in which the main PMCH exists may be an MBSFN subframe and the radio frame may be an MBSFN frame.

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration of a radio frame in which the main PMCH is transmitted in the same subframe as the synchronization channel SCH. FIG. 51 shows a configuration in which the subframe in which the main PMCH is transmitted is # 5 and the main MCH is mapped outside the region to which the synchronization channel SCH is mapped. FIG. 50 shows a configuration in which subframes are mapped to subframes excluding # 0 and # 5. This is because all the OFDM symbols in the subframe can be multi-cell transmitted in the MBSFN synchronization area. Therefore, the transmitter of the base station and the receiver of the mobile terminal can be simplified. In FIG. 51, the main PMCH is further configured as all or part of the area excluding the physical area where the synchronization channel SCH of the subframe # 5 is mapped. It has been described that the synchronization channel SCH is transmitted in the subframes # 0 and # 5 in one radio frame in the MBMS dedicated cell. Here, since the broadcast channel BCH is not transmitted in the subframe # 5, it is not necessary to multiply the cell-specific spreading code or the MBSFN area-specific spreading code. Therefore, it is possible to use all or part of the area of the # 5 subframe excluding the physical area to which the synchronization channel SCH is mapped for the main PMCH. For example, when the SCH is mapped to the sixth and seventh OFDM symbols of the # 5 subframe, the first to fifth and eighth to last OFDM symbols are used as the main PMCH region. In this way, the main PMCH can be transmitted by multicell in the MBSFN synchronization area, and the mobile terminal receives the main PMCH regardless of which MBMS service in the MBSFN synchronization area is being received or is about to be received. In addition, an SFN gain can be obtained. By allowing the # 5 subframe to be used also for the main PMCH, the flexibility of the system is increased and the efficiency of radio resources can be improved.

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the main PMCH provided with a paging signal area. FIG. 52 (a) is a diagram showing a configuration including MBMS related information and a paging signal on the main PMCH. The MBMS related information and the paging signal may exist as information elements in the MTCH and MCCH, respectively, or a physical area (resource) to which each is mapped may be time-division multiplexed. In the case of the mapping method in the case of placing as an information element, the method disclosed in FIG. 56 can be applied as an example. The physical channel PMCH in FIG. 56 may be the main PMCH. Among the MBMS related information, a paging signal is put on the logical channel MCCH as an information element together with MBMS control information. The MCCH is mapped to the transport channel MCH together with the MTCH, and the MCH is mapped to the main PMCH that is a physical channel. This makes it possible to receive a paging signal when a mobile terminal that is receiving or intending to receive an MBMS service receives the MCCH. As another example, the method disclosed in FIG. 57 can be applied. The PMCH that is the physical channel in FIG. 57 may be the main PMCH. The logical channel PCCH carrying the paging signal is multiplexed with the logical channels MTCH and MCCH of the MBMS related information and placed on the transport channel MCH. The base station may provide an MTCH-only MBSFN subframe, an MCS-to-PCCH mapped MBSFN subframe, and an MCCH-only MBSFN subframe and a PCCH-only MBSFN subframe. You may do it. In this way, transmission can be performed after being divided in time. Also, MBSFN subframes carrying MCCH and PCCH may be temporally adjacent. This makes it possible to receive a paging signal when a mobile terminal that is receiving or intending to receive an MBMS service receives the MCCH.

  As yet another example, the method disclosed in FIG. 58 can be applied. The physical channel PMCH in FIG. 58 may be the main PMCH. The PCCH carrying the paging signal is mapped to the transport channel PCH, multiplexed with the MCH, and mapped to the main PMCH. In this way, the base station can transmit the PCH and MCH by dividing them in time, and further can perform encoding separately. Therefore, the mobile terminal can perform decoding separately at the time of reception. In the above example, the difference from Embodiment 1 is that MTCH, MCCH, and PCCH mapped to the main PMCH are transmitted in multicells in the MBSFN synchronization area, not in the MBSFN area. Therefore, the PMCH transmitted in multicell in the MBSFN area and the main PMCH transmitted in multicell in the MBSFN synchronization area may be clearly divided. FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing a mapping method when the main PMCH is provided as a physical channel common to the MBSFN synchronization area. FIG. 60 discloses the mapping when the PMCH and the main PMCH are provided. This example shows the case where MCH and PCH in FIG. 58 are used. MTCH and MCCH, which are MBMS-related information to be transmitted into the MBSFN area, are mapped to the transport channel MCH and mapped to the physical channel PMCH. The PMCH is transmitted in an MBSFN subframe corresponding to the MBSFN area. MTCH and MCCH, which are MBMS related information to be transmitted into the MBSFN synchronization area, are mapped to the transport channel MCH and mapped to the main PMCH, which is a physical channel. The PCCH carrying the paging signal transmitted into the MBSFN synchronization area is mapped to the transport channel PCH and mapped to the main PMCH which is a physical channel. The main PMCH is transmitted in an MBSFN subframe transmitted in multi-cells in the MBSFN synchronization area.

  Also, for the logical channel and / or transport channel, the MBSFN area use and the MBSFN synchronization area use may be provided separately. For example, the case where only the MBMS control information is transmitted in the MBSFN synchronization area is indicated by a broken line in FIG. The logical channel MCCH transmitted in the MBSFN synchronization area may be the main MCCH, for example, and the transport channel MCH may be the main MCH, for example. The main MCH is mapped to the main PMCH, which is a physical channel. By making these separate, the base station scheduling, HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest) processing, encoding processing, AMC (Adaptive Modulation Coding) processing, etc. can be performed separately in the MBSFN synchronization area and the MBSFN area. In addition, it becomes possible to flexibly cope with fluctuations in the radio wave environment between the base station and the mobile terminal, and it is possible to improve the efficiency of radio resources. The MCCH transmitted in multicell within the MBSFN synchronization area includes service information, frame configuration information, and the like of each MBSFN area included in the MBSFN synchronization area. Also, MBMS service control information for each MBSFN area may be included. In this case, since it is not necessary to transmit the MCCH on the PMCH for each MBSFN area, the MBMS data area can be increased, and the MBMS transmission speed can be increased. MCCHs transmitted in multi-cells in the MBSFN synchronization area are periodically transmitted in multi-cells in the main PMCH repetition period in each MBSFN synchronization area.

  On the other hand, a mobile terminal that is receiving or intending to receive an MBMS service transmitted from a cell in a certain MBSFN area periodically receives the MCCH on the main PMCH and receives the contents of the MBMS service, the frame configuration, and the like. By doing so, the MBMS service can be received. Therefore, after receiving and decoding the MCCH on the main PMCH, the mobile terminal can perform intermittent reception operation until the next main PMCH without receiving a PMCH corresponding to another MBSFN area when there is no desired service. It becomes possible. Therefore, the power consumption of the mobile terminal can be reduced. Further, by including a paging signal in the MCCH, it is possible to receive a paging signal when a mobile terminal receiving or attempting to receive an MBMS service receives the MCCH. This eliminates the need for the mobile terminal to separately receive paging at a timing other than receiving the MCCH, and thus enables paging to be received without interrupting reception of the MBMS service. Further, intermittent reception can be performed during a period when the MCCH is not received and during a period when the MBMS service is not being received, so that power consumption of the mobile terminal can be reduced. When the method disclosed in FIG. 57 is applied, MCCH and PCCH may be configured in the same MBSFN subframe, or an MBSFN subframe on which MCCH is carried and an MBSFN subframe on which a paging signal is carried are temporally adjacent. You may do it. When the method disclosed in FIG. 58 is applied, the MBSFN subframe carrying the MCCH and the MBSFN subframe carrying the paging signal may be temporally adjacent. With this configuration, it is possible to continuously receive a paging signal when a mobile terminal that is receiving or intending to receive an MBMS service receives an MCCH. This eliminates the need for the mobile terminal to receive a separate paging signal at a timing other than the reception of subframes carrying MCCH and PCCH, thereby enabling the paging signal to be received without interrupting the reception of the MBMS service. Further, intermittent reception can be performed during a period when the MCCH is not received and during a period when the MBMS service is not being received, so that power consumption of the mobile terminal can be reduced.

  FIG. 52B discloses a configuration in which an “MBMS related information change presence / absence indicator” indicating whether MBMS control information has been changed and a “paging signal presence indicator” indicating whether a paging signal has been transmitted are disclosed. The physical area to which these indicators are mapped may be provided in the MBSFN subframe in which the main PMCH is transmitted, or in the physical area temporally adjacent to the MBSFN subframe in which the main PMCH is transmitted. Also good. By doing so, the mobile terminal can receive and decode the MCCH and the paging signal on the main PMCH immediately after receiving the indicator. For example, 1-bit information is used as an indicator. Each indicator is encoded or mapped to a predetermined physical area by being multiplied by a spreading code unique to the MBSFN synchronization area. For example, when an incoming call occurs in the mobile terminal, the paging signal presence indicator is set to “1”, and when there is no incoming call, the paging signal presence indicator is set to “0”. Also, for example, when MBMS control information on the MCCH is changed due to a change in the content of the MBMS service transmitted in the MBSFN synchronization area, the MBMS related information change presence / absence indicator is set to “1”. . A period (MBMS modification period) in which MBMS related information can be changed is determined, and a change presence / absence indicator “1” is repeatedly transmitted within the period. The MBMS modification period, the start timing (SFN, starting point), etc., in which MBMS-related information can be changed may be determined in advance, from the serving cell in the unicast service, or from the MBMS dedicated cell with the broadcast information You may be notified. If there is no further change in the MBMS related information after the period (MBMS modification period) has passed, the MBMS related information change presence / absence indicator is set to “0”.

  The mobile terminal receives an indicator in an MBSFN subframe in which the main PMCH is transmitted in a multi-cell manner or an adjacent MBSFN subframe, performs despreading, etc., and determines whether the indicator is 1 or 0, so that the MBMS existing in the MCCH It is possible to determine whether the related information has changed or whether paging exists. By providing the indicator in this way, when there is no change in the MBMS control information or when there is no paging, the mobile terminal does not need to receive and decode all the information on the main PMCH. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the reception power of the mobile terminal. The physical area to which the MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicator indicating whether the MBMS control information has been changed may be the first MBSFN subframe of one or more MBSFN subframes to which the MBMS control information is mapped. Further, it may be the first OFDM symbol of the first MBSFN subframe. Accordingly, the mobile terminal can determine whether the MBMS control information has changed by receiving the first OFDM symbol. Further, a physical area to which a paging signal presence / absence indicator indicating whether or not a paging signal is present may be used as the first MBSFN subframe of one or a plurality of MBSFN subframes to which the paging signal is mapped. Further, it may be the first OFDM symbol of the first MBSFN subframe. As a result, the mobile terminal can determine whether a paging signal exists by receiving the first OFDM symbol.

  By mapping each indicator to the physical area as described above, when there is no MBMS control signal change, when there is no paging information, it is not necessary to receive and decode each subsequent OFDM symbol, and the received power of the further mobile terminal Can be reduced. In addition, since it can be determined early with the first MBSFN subframe or the first OFDM symbol, the MBMS control information can be received immediately or the paging signal can be received immediately. Control delay can be reduced. As an indicator, the MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicator and the paging signal presence / absence indicator may be mapped to different physical areas, or may be mapped to different physical areas. When mapping to the same physical area, an OR operation of each indicator may be taken. As a result, since the mobile terminal needs only one indicator to receive, the effect of simplifying the receiving circuit configuration can be obtained. In the case of mapping to different physical areas, this allows the mobile terminal to receive only the necessary indicators and eliminates the need to receive other indicators. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the reception power of the mobile terminal and further reduce the reception delay of necessary information. For example, a mobile terminal that has received an MBMS service but is set not to receive paging need only receive an MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicator, eliminating the need to receive a paging signal presence / absence indicator. it can. The repetition period of each indicator may be the same or different. The repetition period of each indicator may be the same as or different from the repetition period of the main PMCH. For example, an MBMS-related information change presence / absence indicator may be provided in the main PMCH once in several times. The repetition period of the indicator is defined as “paging signal presence / absence indicator repetition period” and “MBMS-related change presence / absence indicator repetition period”, respectively. The start timing (SFN, starting point) of the MBSFN subframe in which the indicator exists, the subframe number, the repetition period of each indicator, etc. may be notified by the broadcast information of the serving cell of the unicast service, or the broadcast of the MBMS dedicated cell It may be notified by information or may be determined in advance.

  Furthermore, a channel dedicated to the change presence / absence indicator of MBMS related information may be configured on the main PMCH, for example, MICH (MBMS Indicating CHannel). A paging signal presence / absence indicator is formed in the MICH, and the MICH repetition period is set to “MICH repetition period”. The repetition period of the paging signal presence / absence indicator may be the same as or different from the MICH repetition period. The notification of the indicator can be performed by the same method described above. Thereby, the time when each indicator is transmitted is not limited to the time when MCCH is transmitted, and the system can be designed flexibly. When configured as described above, the MBMS related information change presence / absence indicator indicates whether the MBMS control information on the main PMCH has been changed. It is unclear just by detecting the indicator. Whether the MBMS service transmitted in the desired MBSFN area has been changed must receive and decode the MBMS control information on the main PMCH. As the MBMS control information on the main PMCH, an indicator may be provided that indicates in which MBSFN area the MBMS service transmitted has been changed. The physical area for the indicator may be provided immediately before the MBSFN subframe carrying the MBMS control information on the main PMCH. In this way, it is possible to detect whether the MBMS service transmitted in a desired MBSFN area has been changed without having to receive and decode all MBMS control information on the main PMCH. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control delay at the mobile terminal.

  In the case where the paging signal is put on the main PMCH, there is a problem that it takes too much time to detect the paging signal addressed to the own mobile terminal if the number of mobile terminals that have received an incoming call becomes enormous. Further, there arises a problem that an area for mapping paging signals of all mobile terminals that have received incoming calls cannot be secured in a predetermined physical area carrying a paging signal. In order to solve these problems, a paging grouping method is disclosed. FIG. 52 (c) shows a configuration example of the paging signal presence / absence indicator. All mobile terminals are divided into K groups, and a paging signal presence / absence indicator is provided for each group. The physical area for the paging signal presence / absence indicator is divided into K pieces, and the paging signal presence / absence indicator of each group is mapped to each of the divided physical areas. Here, K can take from 1 to the value of the total number of mobile terminals. When an incoming call is received at a certain mobile terminal, the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the group to which the mobile terminal belongs is set to “1”. When all mobile terminals belonging to a certain group do not receive an incoming call, the paging signal presence / absence indicator of that group is set to “0”. The paging signal presence / absence indicator may be subjected to repetition or the like of repeatedly mapping “1” (or “0”) to the physical area in order to satisfy a desired reception error rate at the mobile terminal. The physical area to which the paging signal is mapped is also divided into K pieces so as to correspond to the K groups. The paging signal may be an identifier (identification number, identification code) for each mobile terminal. One physical area divided into K is a physical area in which paging signal data required by one mobile terminal is accommodated by adding the number of mobile terminals in the group. The number of mobile terminals in a group may be the same in all groups, or may be different for each group. For example, the number of mobile terminals in the group may be an average value of the number of mobile terminals that simultaneously receive incoming calls. Alternatively, the number of mobile terminals that can be assigned to one OFDM symbol may be used, and each OFDM symbol may be associated with each group.

  When an incoming call occurs at a certain mobile terminal, the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the group to which the mobile terminal belongs is set to “1” and mapped to the paging signal presence / absence indicator physical area corresponding to the group. At the same time, the paging signal for the mobile terminal that has received the incoming call is mapped to the paging-related physical area corresponding to the group to which the mobile terminal belongs. The mapping of the paging signal to the physical channel region is performed by multiplying each mobile terminal by an identification code unique to the mobile terminal. When the paging signal is an identifier for each mobile terminal, the control for multiplying the mobile terminal specific identification code can be omitted. The mobile terminal receives the paging signal presence / absence indicator of the group to which the mobile terminal belongs to determine whether an incoming call has been made to the group to which the mobile terminal belongs. When it is determined that the incoming call is received, the physical area to which the paging signal associated with the group to which the mobile terminal belongs is received and decoded. After decoding, blind detection is performed by performing correlation calculation with an identification code unique to the mobile terminal, and it is possible to determine that there is an incoming call to the mobile terminal by specifying a paging signal for the mobile terminal. . If no paging signal for the mobile terminal is detected, it is determined that there is no incoming call to the mobile terminal. By grouping the mobile terminals into K groups, the mobile terminal does not need to receive the entire paging signal area, and only receives the necessary area, that is, only the physical area to which the group to which the mobile terminal belongs corresponds. Therefore, the reception power of the mobile terminal can be reduced. Furthermore, by using a paging signal presence / absence indicator corresponding to each group, a paging signal presence / absence indicator can be provided with few physical resources even when there are a large number of mobile terminals. Furthermore, the mobile terminal only needs to receive the paging signal area as needed, and it is possible to reduce the reception power of the mobile terminal, and when it is not necessary to receive the paging signal, the mobile terminal immediately moves to the next operation. Therefore, the control delay can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, one physical area divided into K pieces for mapping the paging signal is obtained by adding the physical area in which the paging signal data required by one mobile terminal is accommodated by the number of mobile terminals in the group. It was supposed to be a physical area. However, when the number of mobile terminals increases, the required physical area increases, and the overhead for transmitting the MBMS service increases, so the transmission speed of MBMS service data decreases. In order to prevent this, the paging signal for the mobile terminal is multiplied by an identification code unique to the mobile terminal for each mobile terminal. As a result, the mobile terminal can blindly detect whether the information is addressed to its own mobile terminal using an identification code unique to the mobile terminal, so that the physical area for mapping the paging signal for each mobile terminal is fixed in advance. There is no need to keep it. Therefore, the physical area for all the mobile terminals is not required, and there may be an area for the number of mobile terminals that are expected to actually receive incoming calls. As an example, there is a method in which the number of mobile terminals in the group is an average value of the number of mobile terminals that receive incoming calls simultaneously. This method makes it possible to effectively use limited physical resources. In addition, with the above method, when the number of mobile terminals receiving more than expected is increased, a paging signal to a new incoming mobile terminal is transmitted on the next main PMCH. It becomes possible to respond flexibly by scheduling.

  When the total number of mobile terminals is small, only the paging signal presence / absence indicator may be transmitted with the value of K as the total number of mobile terminals. In this case, it is not necessary to secure a paging signal area, and it is sufficient to secure physical areas for paging signal presence / absence indicators for all the mobile terminals. For this reason, it is possible to improve the efficiency of radio resources. In this case, there is a physical area for a paging signal presence / absence indicator corresponding to each mobile terminal. For this reason, in the mobile terminal, it is possible to determine the presence / absence of an incoming call without receiving the paging signal area only by receiving and decoding the physical area for the paging signal presence / absence indicator corresponding to the mobile terminal. The control delay in the paging operation can be reduced.

  The method disclosed in the first embodiment can be applied to the method for mapping the paging signal to the paging-related physical area of the main PMCH. For example, it is the method of FIG. 42 or FIG. However, in the modulation process, the spreading process, etc., the step of multiplying the MBSFN area-specific spreading code cannot be applied, and it is necessary not to multiply the MBSFN area-specific spreading code or to multiply the MBSFN synchronization area-specific spreading code. is there.

  In the above example, the method disclosed in Embodiment 1 is applied as a method of mapping the configuration of the main PMCH and the paging signal to the main PMCH. Similarly, for example, when the frequency of transmission of the main PMCH is high in time, the method disclosed in the eighth embodiment can be applied as a method of mapping the configuration of the main PMCH and the paging signal to the main PMCH. .

  By providing a physical channel for multi-cell transmission in the MBSFN synchronization area disclosed in the ninth embodiment and placing a paging signal on the physical channel, an MBMS service can be used from an MBMS dedicated cell as a mobile communication system. The paging signal of all the mobile terminals that are receiving or are about to receive can be transmitted, and the mobile terminal can receive the paging signal from the MBMS dedicated cell.

Embodiment 10 FIG.
In the above embodiments, a method has been disclosed in which a paging signal is provided so as to be transmitted in a multi-cell manner from all cells in the MBSFN area or the MBSFN synchronization area. It is conceivable that the MBSFN area and the MBSFN synchronization area are geographically vast. In such a case, transmitting a paging signal for the mobile terminal from a cell that does not contribute to SFN combining in the mobile terminal wastes radio resources and causes a reduction in system capacity. Therefore, it becomes necessary to limit the cell that transmits the paging signal to a cell in which the mobile terminal exists and a neighboring cell. When the cell that transmits the paging signal is limited to the cell in which the mobile terminal exists and the neighboring cell, the cell that transmits the paging signal to a certain mobile terminal and the cell that does not transmit are generated in the same MBSFN area or the same MBSFN synchronization area. Thus, different signals are transmitted between cells, and multi-cell transmission is not performed. Since the mobile terminal cannot selectively limit the cells to be received, a signal that is not multi-cell transmission is also received, causing a reception error. The reception quality of a desired paging signal deteriorates due to a different signal transmitted from a cell that does not transmit a paging signal. In particular, a reception error increases for a mobile terminal that exists near the boundary between a cell that transmits a paging signal and a cell that does not transmit a paging signal, and a paging signal cannot be received. Therefore, this embodiment discloses a configuration in which a cell that transmits a paging signal and a cell that does not transmit a paging signal are provided.

  In order to reduce paging signal reception errors at the mobile terminal, the method of mapping the paging signal is changed between the cell that transmits the paging signal and the cell that does not transmit the paging signal. FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing a method of transmitting a paging signal to some cells in the MBSFN area or the MBSFN synchronization area. As shown in FIG. 53, in the cell that transmits the paging signal, as described with reference to FIG. 42 or 47, the signal is multiplied by the identification number unique to the mobile terminal, and a series of processing is performed. A result is assigned to each control information element unit, and processing is performed until each mobile terminal that receives an incoming call is connected. On the other hand, such processing is not performed in a cell that does not transmit a paging signal. The physical area where the paging signal is carried includes the PMCH, DPCH, and main PMCH shown in the above embodiment. In the MBSFN area or the MBSFN synchronization area, if there is a cell that transmits a paging signal and a cell that does not transmit to a mobile terminal that has received an incoming call, the cell in the cell that transmits the paging signal Connect 2401 to terminal a. The paging signal to the mobile terminal is multiplied by an identification number unique to the mobile terminal, CRC is added, and processing such as encoding and rate matching is performed. Since the switch 2401 is connected to the terminal a, the information after the above processing for each mobile terminal is assigned to a certain control information element unit.

  On the other hand, in a cell that does not transmit a paging signal, the base station connects the switch 2401 in the figure to the terminal b. Without using a paging signal to the mobile terminal, a padding code is provided for each cell, and the padding code is assigned to each control information element unit. Here, the area of the control information element unit allocated to a certain mobile terminal is the same in a cell that transmits a paging signal and a cell that does not transmit. As a result, the base station can easily switch the information allocated between the cell that transmits the paging signal and the cell that does not transmit the paging signal by the switch. Furthermore, by making the size of the control information element unit area allocated to a certain mobile terminal the same for all mobile terminals, it becomes possible to determine the padding code length for each cell in advance. . Thus, padding code embedding control can be easily configured. On the other hand, a mobile terminal receiving or trying to receive a multi-cell MBMS service from a cell in a certain MBSFN area or MBSFN synchronization area receives PMCH, DPCH or main PMCH to which a paging signal is mapped, and demodulates it. Perform processing, despreading processing, etc., and divide into control information element unit areas. The divided area of the control information element unit is decoded and the like, and the paging signal for the own mobile terminal is blind-detected by performing the correlation calculation using the identification number unique to the own terminal. If the correlation calculation result is greater than a certain threshold, it is determined that there is paging for the mobile terminal, and a paging incoming operation is started by a paging signal. If it is less than a certain threshold value, it is determined that there is no paging for the terminal itself, and the process shifts to reception of MBMS related information, or shifts to the intermittent reception operation if it is not necessary to receive MBMS related information.

  If the transmission signal from the cell that does not transmit the paging signal is different from the transmission signal from the cell that transmits the paging signal, the multi-cell transmission is not performed, and the SFN gain cannot be obtained by the multi-cell transmission. A transmission signal from a cell that does not transmit becomes noise, and errors increase in the correlation calculation result at the mobile terminal. As disclosed in the present embodiment, in a cell that does not transmit a paging signal, a padding (embedding, setting) code is determined in advance, and the padding code is embedded in an area where the paging signal is mapped, It is possible to reduce errors in correlation calculation at the mobile terminal. FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a padding code for each cell provided in a cell that does not transmit a paging signal. For example, a cell that does not transmit a paging signal has a padding code of “all 0” (all 0). In this case, the same code, that is, “all 0” is set in all cells not transmitting the paging signal. In this way, since the mobile terminal has an interference canceling function such as an interference canceller in the mobile terminal, the mobile terminal can cancel the “0” component transmitted from the cell that does not transmit the paging signal. Only the paging signal transmitted from the cell transmitting the signal can be SFN-combined, and the reception error of the paging signal in the correlation calculation at the mobile terminal can be reduced. The padding code for cells that do not transmit paging may be “all 1”. In this case, the same code, that is, all 1 is set in all cells that do not transmit paging. Also in this case, since the mobile terminal has an interference canceling function such as an interference canceller, the “1” component can be canceled, and the reception error of the paging signal at the mobile terminal can be reduced. It should be noted that a known specific code may be used instead of all 0 and all 1. A padding code for a cell that does not transmit a paging signal may be a random value. In this case, a random value is derived for each cell and padded. In this way, in the mobile terminal, the signals transmitted from the cells that do not transmit the paging signal are canceled each other due to different random signals, and the paging signal components transmitted from the cell that transmits the paging signal are relative to each other. Therefore, it is possible to reduce paging signal reception errors in the correlation calculation.

  A paging transmission cell identification code for identifying a cell that transmits a paging signal and a cell that does not transmit the paging signal may be used. The paging transmission cell identification code may be an orthogonal or pseudo-orthogonal code. Further, it may be a scrambling code or a spreading code. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing a method of using a paging transmission cell identification code. The base station multiplies the paging signal by the mobile terminal identification code, performs coding processing such as CRC addition, encoding, rate matching, MCS (Modulation Coding Scheme) reflection, and multiplies the paging transmission cell identification code. . As a paging transmission cell identification code, a spreading code for a paging signal transmission cell is used in a cell that transmits a paging signal. In a cell that does not transmit a paging signal, a spreading code for a paging signal non-transmitting cell is used. The spreading code for the paging signal transmission cell and the spreading code for the paging signal non-transmission cell, which are paging transmission cell identification codes, are set as orthogonal codes. The result of multiplying these paging transmission cell identification codes is assigned to each control information element unit and connected to each mobile terminal that is receiving an incoming call. On the other hand, a mobile terminal receiving or trying to receive an MBMS service transmitted from a cell in an MBSFN area or an MBSFN synchronization area receives a PMCH, DPCH, or main PMCH to which a paging signal is mapped. Then, demodulation processing, despreading processing, etc. are performed to divide the area into control information element units. The divided area of the control information element unit is despread by the paging signal transmission cell spreading code. In the same physical area, the cells that transmit the paging signal and the cells that do not transmit are multiplied and transmitted by orthogonal spreading codes, so by performing despreading using the spreading code for the paging signal transmission cell, It is possible to eliminate the influence of a signal from a cell that does not transmit a paging signal, and a reception error can be reduced.

  The despread data is subjected to processing such as decoding, and blind detection is performed using the mobile terminal identification code. If the correlation calculation result is greater than a certain threshold, it is determined that there is paging for the mobile terminal, and a paging incoming operation is started by a paging signal. If it is less than a certain threshold value, it is determined that there is no paging for the terminal itself, and the process shifts to reception of MBMS related information, or shifts to the intermittent reception operation if it is not necessary to receive MBMS related information. Each paging transmission cell identification code may be determined in advance, or may be notified by broadcast information of an MBMS dedicated cell or broadcast information of a unicast cell. In this way, by multiplying the spreading code orthogonal between the cell that transmits the paging signal and the cell that does not transmit, and despreading on the receiving side, the influence of the signal from the cell that does not transmit the paging signal is eliminated, and the paging signal Can be extracted with a low reception error. In the present invention, the order of multiplying the mobile terminal identification code and the paging transmission cell identification code may be reversed. When the mobile terminal identification code is multiplied later, the mobile terminal first determines whether there is a paging signal for the mobile terminal by performing a correlation operation with an identification number unique to the mobile terminal first. The advantage is that this is possible.

  In the present embodiment, each cell may be a code that does not transmit a paging signal with a padding code or a paging transmission cell identification code as an initial setting. Only when a paging occurrence notification is received from the MME, MCE or MBMS-GW, the cell sends a paging signal and a paging transmission cell identification code to only the mobile terminal that has received the notification. A code to be transmitted may be used. This eliminates the need to send a notification that no paging occurs from the MME, MCE, or MBMS-GW to each cell, thereby reducing the amount of signaling.

  By configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a cell that transmits a paging signal and a cell that does not transmit, and even when the MBSFN area or the MBSFN synchronization area is geographically vast, It becomes possible to limit the cell which transmits a paging signal to the cell in which a mobile terminal exists, and the nearby cell. Even when the cell that transmits the paging signal is limited to the cell in which the mobile terminal exists and the neighboring cell, the reception quality of the desired paging signal is deteriorated by the different signal transmitted from the cell that does not transmit the paging signal in the mobile terminal. An effect is obtained that a paging signal can be received without causing it to occur. In particular, an effect that a high-quality paging signal can be received is obtained for a mobile terminal that exists near the boundary between a cell that transmits a paging signal and a cell that does not transmit a paging signal. Further, for example, when a paging signal is transmitted only to a cell in one or a plurality of MBSFN areas that are geographically close to the tracking area of a unicast cell, the MME that has received the paging request is in each of the MBSFN synchronization areas. It is not necessary to transmit a paging request signal to all corresponding MCEs, and it is only necessary to transmit a paging request signal to the MCE that controls the MBSFN area. The MCE that has received the paging request signal transmits a paging signal to a cell in the MBSFN area controlled by the MCE, and the MCE that does not receive the paging request signal does not transmit the paging signal in the MBSFN area controlled by the MCE. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of signaling between the MME and the MCE. Furthermore, by limiting the cells that transmit the paging signal to the cells where the mobile terminal exists and the neighboring cells, the physical resources used for the paging signal transmission of a certain mobile terminal can be transferred to other mobile terminals at geographically distant locations. It can be used for paging signal transmission to a terminal, and the efficiency of radio resources can be improved.

Embodiment 11 FIG.
In the second embodiment, the paging signal is transmitted from the base station every MCCH repetition period (MCCH repetition period) or every paging signal presence / absence indicator repetition period, and the mobile terminal receiving the paging signal performs an intermittent reception operation in those repetition periods. A method of doing so has been disclosed. Here, another new method is disclosed as a paging signal notification method. As described in the second embodiment, in the conventional technique (W-CDMA), the number of S-CCPCHs (number of channelization codes) to which PCH is mapped is defined as the number of groups, and the mobile terminal identifier (UE-IDD, IMSI), a method of calculating a timing at which a paging indication is transmitted using intermittent reception timing, that is, an SFN (System Frame Number). However, there is no disclosure of a paging signal notification method in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer of the LTE system. In the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer, multi-cell transmission is used, and furthermore, any one cell is allowed to belong to a plurality of MBSFN areas, so that a paging signal is transmitted on which radio frame or on which subframe. As for the mapping method, the conventional paging indication transmission method cannot be applied. Furthermore, since the LTE system is not a CDM method, there is no concept of the number of channelization codes. It is impossible to apply technology. Therefore, here, a method for notifying a paging signal in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer of the LTE system is disclosed. In the description, the description will focus on parts that are different from the second embodiment. Portions that are not particularly described are the same as in the second embodiment.

  As a method for the MBMS dedicated cell notifying the paging signal in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer of the LTE system, the paging signal is transmitted in all radio frames corresponding to the MBSFN area to which the cell belongs. As a specific example, as shown in FIG. 40, a paging signal notification method is disclosed when there is no overlapping (overlapping) MBSFN area in each cell and the MBSFN subframe corresponding to the MBSFN area is CDMed. . First, a paging group calculation formula will be disclosed. In the paging group calculation formula (IMSI mod Ksf), Ksf is the number of paging groups. A specific example of the value of Ksf is the number of MBSFN subframes in one radio frame. When the number of MBSFN subframes in one radio frame is 10, Ksf = 10. When the number of MBSFN subframes excluding # 0 and # 5 to which SCH is mapped in one radio frame is used, Ksf = 8. By associating the value of Ksf (the remainder value in Ksf) with the subframe number in the radio frame, the mobile station moves to any subframe in the radio frame according to the paging group value calculated by the above formula. It can be seen whether the paging information of the group to which the terminal belongs is mapped.

  Next, it associates with which radio frame the paging signal of the group to which it belongs is mapped. As a specific example, the calculation formula is as follows. “Paging Occasion” = (IMSI div Ksf) mod (intermittent reception period in MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer) + n × (intermittent reception period in MBMS transmission frequency layer), n: 0, 1, 2,. -However, the maximum value of Paging Occusion <= SFN. SFN is an integer from 0 to the maximum value of SFN.

  A “paging generation radio frame” (hereinafter referred to as paging occasion) is an SFN to which a paging signal is mapped. As can be seen from this equation, the paging occasion can take all values from 0 to the maximum value of SFN. Therefore, compared to the method disclosed in the second embodiment, it is possible to increase the number of MBSFN subframes for carrying a paging signal and the number of radio frames having the MBSFN subframes. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the number of mobile terminals that can be carried in one MBSFN subframe, and the physical area required to carry the paging signal of the number of mobile terminals in one MBSFN subframe can be reduced. become. In addition, since it is not necessary to determine the intermittent reception cycle in the MBMS transmission frequency layer depending on the cycle in which the MCCH is transmitted, the intermittent reception cycle can be flexibly set as a system. Next, a physical area for carrying a paging signal will be described. A configuration is adopted in which all radio frames corresponding to the MBSFN area to which the cell belongs are transmitted. A method of providing a paging-dedicated physical channel (DPCH) disclosed in the eighth embodiment for multi-cell transmission in the MBSFN area and placing a paging signal on the physical channel is applied. As shown in FIG. 45, a DPCH for placing a paging signal in a part of the MBSFN subframe corresponding to the MBSFN area is provided. DPCH may be configured in all radio frames corresponding to the MBSFN area, and DPCH may be configured in all MBSFN subframes in one radio frame, except for # 0 and # 5 to which SCH is mapped in one radio frame. It may be configured in an MBSFN subframe. When DPCH is configured in all MBSFN subframes in one radio frame, Ksf = 10 may be set, and MBSFN subframes except for # 0 and # 5 to which SCH is mapped in one radio frame are configured. In this case, Ksf = 8 may be set. Further, Ksf may be another value as long as it is the number of subframes in one radio frame. Since the method disclosed in the eighth embodiment can be applied to the method for mapping the paging signal to the paging signal dedicated channel for the paging signal on the paging dedicated channel, description thereof is omitted here.

  By using the paging signal notification method and the channel configuration on which the paging signal is placed as described above, the paging signal can be transmitted in all radio frames corresponding to the MBSFN area to which the MBMS dedicated cell belongs. The MBMS dedicated cell can notify the paging signal in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer.

As another specific example, a method of transmitting a paging signal when the DRX period is taken into consideration is disclosed. In the second embodiment, in order to notify the paging signal in the MBMS transmission dedicated cell, to maintain synchronization in the unicast / mixed frequency layer, to acquire broadcast information, and to perform cell reselection, for measurement of the unicast / mixed frequency layer A method for providing a DRX period is disclosed. Here, in the case where the DRX period is provided, a paging signal transmission method when the DRX period is also taken into consideration will be described. Since the detailed description about the DRX is disclosed in the second embodiment, it is omitted here. In this specific example, it is assumed that one DRX period is provided in the MBSFN synchronization area. FIG. 61 shows an example of MBSFN subframe configuration for each MBSFN area in each cell when the DRX period is also taken into consideration. SFN is set to 0 to SFNmax, and the DRX period is set to d radio frame. From each cell, MBMS data is transmitted in a radio frame of SFN = 0 to SFNmax-d. SFN = SFNmax−d + 1 to SFNmax is a DRX period, and transmission is turned off. One DRX period is provided in the MBSFN synchronization area. Therefore, the cells belonging to each MBSFN area are turned off at the same timing (SFN). The paging signal is transmitted on the DPCH disclosed in the eighth embodiment in a radio frame of SFN = 0 to SFNmax-d in which MBMS data is transmitted. First, a paging group calculation formula will be disclosed. The paging group calculation formula is shown below.
IMSI mod Ksf
Let Ksf be the number of paging groups. A specific example of the value of Ksf is the number of MBSFN subframes in one radio frame. When the number of MBSFN subframes in one radio frame is 10, Ksf = 10. When the number of MBSFN subframes excluding # 0 and # 5 to which the SCH is mapped in one radio frame is used, Ksf = 8. By associating the value of Ksf with the subframe number in the radio frame, it is possible to know to which subframe in the radio frame the paging information of the group to which the mobile terminal belongs is mapped by the paging group. Become.

Next, two methods are disclosed as specific calculation formulas regarding to which radio frame the paging signal of the group to which the user belongs is mapped. First, the first method is disclosed. Set Paging Occasion as follows.
Paging occasion = (IMSI div Ksf) mod (SFNmax-ΣDRX),
Intermittent reception period in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer = SFNmax,
However, the paging occasion is a value obtained by renumbering radio frames excluding DRX.

  Here, SFNmax is the maximum value of SFN, and ΣDRX is the sum of all DRX periods existing from 0 to SFNmax. That is, (SFNmax−ΣDRX) indicates the number of radio frames excluding the DRX period. Therefore, as can be seen from this equation, the SFN to which the paging signal is mapped can take the value of the radio frame in which the MBSFN subframe for each MBSFN area excluding DRX exists. Further, since the intermittent reception cycle is set to SFNmax, for a certain mobile terminal, one paging occasion occurs when SFN is 0 to SFNmax. This makes it possible to provide a paging signal in the MBSFN subframe corresponding to the MBSFN area that the mobile terminal is receiving or is about to receive, and the mobile terminal is receiving or attempting to receive the paging signal. A paging signal can be received. Since the above-described method can be applied to the configuration method of the physical area on which the paging signal is placed and the method of mapping the paging signal to the paging signal dedicated channel, description thereof is omitted here.

A second method for disclosing to which radio frame the paging signal of the group to which the user belongs is mapped is disclosed. A method having two types of cycles as the intermittent reception cycle in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer. One is a cycle in which intermittent reception is repeated within the maximum value of SFN, and the other is a cycle in which intermittent reception is repeated for each maximum value of SFN. The specific paging occasion (Paging Occasion) is as follows.
Paging Occasion = (IMSI div Ksf) mod (intermittent reception cycle # 1 in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer) + n × (intermittent reception cycle # 1 in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer),
Intermittent reception cycle # 1 ≦ (SFNmax−ΣDRX) in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer,
Intermittent reception period # 2 = SFNmax in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer,
n: 0, 1, 2,... However, ∀Paging Occlusion ≦ (SFNmax−ΣDRX).
However, the paging occasion is a value obtained by renumbering radio frames excluding DRX.

Here, the intermittent reception cycle # 1 in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer is a cycle in which intermittent reception is repeated within the maximum value of SFN. The intermittent reception cycle # 2 in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer is a cycle in which intermittent reception is repeated for each maximum value of SFN. In the intermittent reception cycle # 2 in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer, the value pattern of the radio frame between 0 and SFNmax calculated in the intermittent reception cycle # 1 in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer is repeated for each maximum value of SFN. It is the period for setting as follows. By determining n so that all possible values of the paging occasion calculation result are (SFNmax-ΣDRX) or less, the paging opportunities of each mobile terminal are given equally. If it is not necessary to give each mobile terminal equal paging opportunities,
n: 0, 1, 2,... However, Paging Occation ≦ (SFNmax−ΣDRX) may be used.
By doing this, there will be a difference in paging opportunities for each mobile terminal, but there will be no radio frames that are not used for paging signal notification, and it will be possible for mobile terminals to receive paging signals as much as possible, It is possible to reduce paging signal reception errors, incoming operation delays, and the like.

A specific setting example of the intermittent reception cycle # 1 in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer is shown. For example,
a × 2 ^(k−1) ≦ SFNmax−ΣDRX, where a and k are positive integers,
In advance, a, a × 2, a × 2 ² ,..., A × 2 ^(k−1) are set as the intermittent reception cycle # 1 in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer so that they can be selected from them. It ’s fine. a, k values are selected in the upper layer, and broadcast information of cells in the unicast / mixed frequency layer, broadcast information of cells in the MBMS dedicated frequency layer, or in the MBSFN area being received or about to be received by the mobile terminal The mobile terminal may be notified using the MCCH corresponding to the MBMS service, and the mobile terminal may calculate based on the notified value. Also in this method, since the above-described method can be applied to the configuration method of the physical area on which the paging signal is carried and the method of mapping the paging signal to the paging signal dedicated channel, the description thereof is omitted here.

  In the above, the transmission method of the paging signal when the DRX period is taken into consideration has been disclosed. This method having two kinds of intermittent reception periods in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer is also applicable to the case where MBSFN subframes corresponding to the MBSFN area are TDM-equipped. For example, as shown in FIG. 49, when there is no overlapping MBSFN area in each cell and there is a DRX period when an MBSFN subframe corresponding to the MBSFN area is TDM, (SFNmax-ΣDRX) Instead of this, the number of radio frames having MBSFN subframes corresponding to the MBSFN area to which each cell belongs may be set, and the number of MBSFN subframes in one radio frame may be set to Ksf. For example, as shown in FIG. 49, there is an overlapping MBSFN area in each cell, an MBSFN subframe corresponding to a non-overlapping MBSFN area is CDMed, and an overlapping MBSFN area is supported. When the MBSFN subframe is TDM and there is a DRX period, several methods are conceivable.

  Similarly, when a paging signal is transmitted on one MBSFN area to which each cell belongs, similarly, instead of (SFNmax-ΣDRX), the number of radio frames having MBSFN subframes corresponding to the MBSFN area is set. Of these, the number of MBSFN subframes may be set to Ksf. When transmitting a paging signal even in the covering MBSFN area (area 4), a DPCH is provided in the # 0 and # 5 subframes of the covering MBSFN area, and scrambling of the covering MBSFN area (for example, area 1) is performed. Just send a ring code. As disclosed in the second embodiment, since the SCH is transmitted in the subframes # 0 and # 5 of the MBSFN subframe corresponding to the covered MBSFN area, the scrambling code and the reference signal of the MBSFN area 1 are transmitted. (RS) is configured to be used. Therefore, DPCH is provided in the subframes of # 0 and # 5 in the covering MBSFN area, and the DPCH is provided in all radio frames except for the DRX period by multiplying and sending the MBSFN area 1 scrambling code. Is possible. Therefore, (SFNmax-ΣDRX) may be used as it is, and Ksf may be set to 2 (corresponding to # 0 and # 5 subframes). If there is no subframe to be multiplied by the scrambling code of the covered MBSFN area (eg area 1) in the covering MBSFN area (area 4), the same paging signal shall be transmitted in all radio frames except for the DRX period. Is impossible. Therefore, DPCH is provided in the MBSFN subframe of only MBSFN area 1 or MBSFN area 4 and a paging signal is transmitted. In this case, as in the case of transmitting a paging signal on one MBSFN area, the number of radio frames having MBSFN subframes corresponding to any one MBSFN area is set instead of (SFNmax−ΣDRX). The number of MBSFN subframes in the radio frame may be set to Ksf.

  In the above description, it has been explained that the transmission method of this paging signal is applicable even when the MBSFN subframe corresponding to the MBSFN area is TDM. However, in this case, a DRX period is further provided. Is applicable. By adopting the paging signal notification method and the channel configuration on which the paging signal is carried as described above, even when a DRX period is provided in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer, the MBMS dedicated cell in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer of the LTE system. Can be notified of a paging signal. Furthermore, as the DRX period, the case where the DRX period is provided for the purpose of enabling synchronization maintenance in the unicast / mixed frequency layer, acquisition of broadcast information, and cell reselection has been described above. Even when a period is provided, since the paging signal notification method and the channel configuration on which the paging signal is disclosed disclosed in the present embodiment can be applied, the unicast / mixed frequency layer, the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer, Other systems can coexist and be shared, and a mobile communication system can be configured and operated flexibly.

  A process flow of the mobile communication system in the present embodiment will be described. Differences from the method disclosed in the second embodiment are mainly described. First, in addition to MCCH scheduling information such as MCCH repetition period and DRX information for unicast / mixed frequency layer measurement, parameters for MBMS reception time absence reception, specifically MBMS transmission The mobile terminal must be notified of the intermittent reception cycle in the dedicated frequency layer and the intermittent reception cycles # 1, # 2, a, k, Ksf in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer. It is not necessary to notify all of these pieces of information, and it is only necessary to notify necessary parameters according to the paging group to be used and the calculation formula of the paging occasion (paging occasion). These parameters for reception without MBMS reception time may be reported to the mobile terminal via the BCCH from the MBMS dedicated cell in ST1723 and ST1724 together with information related to MCCH scheduling. In addition, MBMS area information, DRX information for unicast / mixed frequency layer measurement, and the number of paging groups may be notified from the MBMS dedicated cell to the mobile terminal via MCCH in ST1728 and ST1729. Here, it is only required to be notified of the parameters necessary for the paging-acquisition calculation formula. However, not only the paging-acquisition, but a parameter indicating which timing (SFN) the mobile terminal should receive during the intermittent reception operation. If it is good. Specific examples include explicit reception timing (SFN) and intermittent reception cycle.

  Next, the intermittent reception preparation operation in the mobile terminal will be described. FIG. 62 shows the intermittent reception preparation operation process in the mobile terminal according to the present embodiment. ST6201 is performed instead of ST1735 in FIG. In ST6201, the mobile terminal performs MBMS reception time missing reception preparation using the MBMS reception time missing reception parameter received in step ST1729. Specifically, using the number of paging groups Ksf received in step ST1729, the intermittent reception cycle in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer, a, k, DRX information, etc., the paging group and paging occasion of the mobile terminal described above are used. calculate. In addition, the mobile terminal identification ID (UE-ID, IMSI) is used to calculate the paging group and the paging occasion. SFNmax may be determined in advance as a system, and the value is used.

  Next, the intermittent reception process at the time of MBMS reception will be described. FIG. 63 shows MBMS reception time missing reception processing in the present embodiment. In Step ST6301, the mobile terminal determines whether it is the reception timing of the paging signal from the paging occasion calculation result performed in Step ST6201. More specifically, it is determined whether the SFN number of the paging occasion addressed to the mobile terminal itself. If it is not a paging occasion SFN number, the mobile terminal makes a transition to ST6306. In ST6306, the mobile terminal uses MCCH scheduling received in ST1725 to determine whether it is MCCH reception timing. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the head SFN number to which the MCCH is mapped is determined. As a specific example, the MCCH repetition period of the parameter example received in step ST1725, the head SFN number to which the MCCH is mapped is obtained using the starting point value, and the MCCH is mapped based on the SFN mapped to the BCCH or the like. It is determined whether or not it is the head to be played. When it is not the head timing to which MCCH is mapped, it transfers to step ST1753. When it is the head timing to which MCCH is mapped, it transfers to step ST1788. For example, step ST1722 may be determined for each MCCH repetition period 1 in FIG. For example, in FIGS. 27 and 29, the determination may be made for each MCCH repetition period. If it is determined in ST6301 that the SFN number is a paging occasion, the mobile terminal makes a transition to ST6302.

  In step ST6307, paging occurs to the mobile terminal. In Step ST6308, the MME confirms the TA (Tracking Area) list of the mobile terminal based on the identifier (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.) of the mobile terminal where paging has occurred. In Step ST6309, the MME determines whether TA (MBMS) is included in the TA list of the mobile terminal. As a specific example, the TA list of the mobile terminal is searched based on the UE-ID in the list as shown in FIG. If the mobile terminal is UE # 1 (UE-ID # 1) in FIG. 31 [a], it is determined that TA (MBMS) is not included. On the other hand, when the mobile terminal is UE # 2 (UE-ID # 2) in FIG. 31 [a], it is determined that TA (MBMS) is included because TA (MBMS) # 1 is included. To do. When TA (MBMS) is not included, it transfers to step ST1814. If TA (MBMS) is included, the process proceeds to step ST6310. In Step ST6310, the MME transmits a paging request to the MCE. As MCEs that transmit a paging request from the MME, all MCEs that manage base stations that are geographically overlapped with the base stations managed by the MME are conceivable. Specific examples of parameters in the paging request include mobile terminal identifiers (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.), TA (MBMS) numbers, and the like. At this time, f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID or MBSFN area ID may be used instead of the TA (MBMS) number.

  In step ST6311, the MCE receives the paging request. Of the MCEs that have received the paging request in step ST6312, the MCE that is notified as a parameter in the paging request and controls the MBSFN area ID associated with the TA (MBMS) number prepares for paging transmission. As a specific example of preparation for paging transmission, a paging group and a paging occasion of the mobile terminal are calculated using parameters for reception when MBMS reception time is missing. More specifically, the parameters for the MBMS reception time missing reception are the number of paging groups Ksf of the own base station (own MBSFN Area), the intermittent reception cycle in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer, a, k, DRX information, and the like. When calculating the paging group and the paging occasion, the same formula as that used on the mobile terminal side is used. Since a specific calculation formula has been described above, it is omitted here. As described above, the method for managing the connection between the TA (MBMS) number (MBSFN Area) and the MCE on the MCE side that has received the paging request is based on the relationship between the MBSFN area ID and the MCE that controls the MBSFN architecture. Since it can be performed only within the network, that is, it can be performed independently of the MME, it is possible to obtain an effect that a mobile communication system with a high degree of freedom can be constructed.

  Further, the MME manages the MBSFN area ID related to the TA (MBMS) number as shown in FIG. 31 [c], and further, as shown in FIG. 31 [d], the MBSFN area ID and the MCE that controls the MBSFN area ID. Consider the case of managing numbers. In that case, in step ST6310, the MME transmits a paging request only to the MCE that manages the MBSFN area ID related to the TA (MBMS) number. As a specific example of the parameter in the paging request at that time, an identifier of the mobile terminal can be considered. The MCE that has received the paging request in Step ST6311 prepares for paging transmission as described above. As described above, in the method of managing the relationship between the MBSFN area ID and the MCE that controls the ID within the MME (FIG. 31 [d]), the number of MCEs notified from the MME to the MCE is reduced, so that the resources are effectively used. Can be obtained. Further, since the amount of information to be notified is reduced, it is possible to obtain an effect that resources can be effectively used.

  Further, the MME manages the MBSFN area ID related to the TA (MBMS) number as shown in FIG. 31 [c], and further, the MBMS included in the MBSFN area ID and the MBSFN area ID as shown in FIG. 31 [e]. Consider a case where the cell IDs of dedicated cells and MBMS / unicast mixed cells are managed. In this case, in step ST6310, the MME transmits a paging request to the cell included in the MBSFN area ID managed by the MME, not the MCE. As a specific example of the parameter in the paging request at that time, an identifier of the mobile terminal can be considered. As described above, the method for managing the relationship between the MBSFN area ID and the cells included in the MBSFN area ID in the MME (FIG. 31 [e]) does not require the MCE to perform processing related to paging signal transmission of the mobile terminal. Get better. This eliminates the need to add a function to the MCE, so that the effect of avoiding the complexity of the MCE can be obtained. In addition, an effect of reducing the processing load of the MCE can be obtained.

  As a channel configuration example for actually mapping the paging signal in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer, the channel configuration of the paging dedicated channel (DPCH) and the method for mapping the paging signal to the paging signal dedicated channel disclosed in the eighth embodiment can be applied. FIG. 46, FIG. 47, and FIG. 48 show their configuration and method. Since these details are disclosed in the eighth embodiment, they are omitted here.

  Hereinafter, the channel configuration for mapping the paging signal in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47 as an example. In Step ST6313, the MCE schedules the paging signal of the mobile terminal. Specifically, the PCFICH value is determined from the paging signal physical area (number of OFDM symbols) required according to the number of mobile terminals in which paging has occurred. In addition, the mobile terminal of the information element mapped to the paging signal physical area on the MBSFN subframe number of the SFN number obtained from the paging group number of the mobile terminal calculated in step ST6312 and the paging occasion. Decide whether to assign an identifier. By performing this scheduling in the MCE, the identifier of the mobile terminal is transmitted from the same physical resource of the base station included in the MBSFN area. As a result, the mobile terminal can receive the paging signal benefiting from the SFN gain by receiving the DPCH transmitted in multi-cell in the MBSFN area. In Step ST6314, the MCE transmits a paging request for the mobile terminal to the base station in the MBSFN area. As specific examples of parameters included in the paging request, mobile terminal identifiers (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.), scheduling results of paging signals performed in step ST6313 (specifically, SFN, MBSFN subframes) Number, information element number, and PCFICH value). In Step ST6315, each base station in the MBSFN area receives a paging request from the MCE.

  Instead of providing the MME-MCE IF between the MME 103 and the MCE 801, an MME-MBMS GW interface may be provided between the MME 103 and the MBMS GW 802 (more specifically, MBMS CP 802-1). Even if the processing contents of MCE from step ST6311 to step ST6314 are performed by the MBMS GW, the same effect as the present invention can be obtained.

  In step ST6316, each base station in the MBSFN area calculates the mobile terminal paging group and the paging occasion. In the calculation, the same formula as that used on the mobile terminal side is used. If the paging group and the paging occasion of the mobile terminal are also notified in step ST6314, step ST6316 can be omitted. Thereby, the reduction effect of the control load of each base station in the MBSFN area can be obtained. On the other hand, in the method of calculating the paging group and the paging occasion at each base station in the MBSFN area in step ST6316 without notifying the paging group or the paging occasion of the mobile terminal in step ST6314, the MCE to the MBSFN area The notification information for each base station can be reduced, and the effect of effective use of resources can be obtained. In step ST6317, each base station in the MBSFN area derives the radio frame number and MBSFN subframe number for transmitting the paging signal using the identifier of the mobile terminal, the scheduling result of the paging signal received in step ST6315. To do. In Step ST6318, the PCFICH value is mapped to the PCFICH physical area of the derived radio frame number and MBSFN subframe number, and the mobile terminal's DPCH physical area of the derived radio frame number and MBSFN subframe number is mapped to the physical area of the DPCH. The identifier is assigned to the information element number and mapped and transmitted. In this case, the method disclosed in the eighth embodiment can be used as a mapping method to a paging-related area in the DPCH, a specific physical channel mapping method, and the like.

  In Step ST6302, the mobile terminal receives the PCFICH of the MBSFN subframe of the own group obtained from the paging group calculation result. In Step ST6303, the mobile terminal determines the number of OFDM symbols for DPCH from PCFICH. In Step ST6304, the mobile terminal receives and decodes the physical region carrying the DPCH of the same MBSFN subframe based on the determined number of DPCH OFDM symbols. At that time, blind detection is performed by performing a correlation calculation with an identification code unique to the mobile terminal. In step ST6305, the mobile terminal determines whether the identifier of the mobile terminal has been detected in the blind detection performed in step ST6304. When not detected, it transfers to step ST1788. If detected, the process proceeds to step ST1819.

  Thus, it is possible to disclose a paging signal notification method and a mobile communication system therefor for a mobile terminal receiving an MBMS service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, which is the first problem of the present invention. As a result, the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated for MBMS transmission can also receive the paging signal.

  By using the method of notifying the paging signal in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer disclosed in the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the number of MBSFN subframes carrying the paging signal and the number of radio frames having the MBSFN subframe. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the number of mobile terminals that can be carried in one MBSFN subframe, and the physical area required to carry the paging signal of the number of mobile terminals in one MBSFN subframe can be reduced. become. In addition, since it is not necessary to determine the intermittent reception cycle in the MBMS transmission frequency layer depending on the cycle in which the MCCH is transmitted, the intermittent reception cycle can be flexibly set as a system.

  In the above description, as a paging signal notification method, the case where the paging occasion exists in all radio frames except the DRX period has been described. The paging occasion may be one or a plurality of radio frames excluding the DRX period. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a paging dedicated channel (DPCH) for carrying a paging signal in all radio frames, and it becomes possible to transmit data for MBMS service in radio frames that do not carry a paging signal. Service speed and capacity can be increased. A specific method is disclosed in which one or a plurality of radio frames excluding the DRX period are used as a paging occasion. The calculation formula of the paging group is the same, and K is IMSI mod K as the number of paging groups.

  A specific example of the value of K is the number of MBSFN subframes in one radio frame. For example, when the number of MBSFN subframes in one radio frame is 10, K = 10. When the number of MBSFN subframes excluding # 0 and # 5 to which SCH is mapped in one radio frame is used, K = 8. By associating the value of K (the remainder value at K) with the subframe number in the radio frame, the mobile station moves to any subframe in the radio frame according to the paging group value calculated by the above formula. It can be seen whether the paging information of the group to which the terminal belongs is mapped. Next, it associates with which radio frame the paging signal of the group to which it belongs is mapped. As a specific example, the calculation formula is as follows. First, a case where there is no DRX period will be disclosed.

  “Paging Occasion” = (IMSI div K) mod X + n × (intermittent reception cycle in the MBMS transmission frequency layer), n: 0, 1, 2,..., Where Paging Occation ≦ SFN . SFN is an integer from 0 to the maximum value of SFN. X is the number of radio frames in which paging occurs within the intermittent reception cycle in the MBMS transmission frequency layer, and X ≦ intermittent reception cycle (number of radio frames) in the MBMS transmission frequency layer. Note that the value of X (the remainder value at X) and the radio frame number (SFN) are associated with each other.

  In this way, paging can occur in X radio frames within the intermittent reception period in the MBMS transmission frequency layer, and the radio frame automatically moves to which radio frame depending on the value of the paging occasion calculated by the above formula. It will be understood whether the paging information of the terminal is carried. In a radio frame other than the radio frame related to the value of X, paging occasion does not occur, and data for MBMS service can be transmitted. When radio frames in which paging occurs are periodic, for example, when the period is TX, the following equation may be used.

  “Paging Occasion” = ((IMSI div K) mod (Int (T / TX))) × TX + n × (intermittent reception cycle in MBMS transmission frequency layer), n: 0, 1, 2, .. However, the maximum value of Paging Occlusion ≦ SFN. SFN is an integer from 0 to the maximum value of SFN. TX ≤ MBMS transmission frequency layer intermittent reception period (number of radio frames).

  By making it periodic, it is no longer necessary to associate the aforementioned X value (the remainder value at X) with the radio frame number (SFN), so that the calculation operation can be simplified. Next, a case where there is a DRX period will be disclosed. “Paging Occasion” = (IMSI div K) mod X + n × (intermittent reception cycle in the MBMS transmission frequency layer), n: 0, 1, 2,..., Where Paging Occation ≦ SFN . SFN is an integer from 0 to the maximum value of SFN. X is the number of radio frames in which paging occurs within the intermittent reception period in the MBMS transmission frequency layer, and X ≦ (SFNmax−ΣDRX). Note that the value of X (the remainder value at X) and the radio frame number (SFN) are associated with each other.

  Or, “paging occurrence radio frame” (Paging Occasion) = ((IMSI div K) mod (Int (T / TX))) × TX + n × (intermittent reception cycle in MBMS transmission frequency layer), n: 0, 1, 2 However, the maximum value of Paging Occlusion ≦ SFN. SFN is an integer from 0 to the maximum value of SFN. TX ≦ (SFNmax−ΣDRX). However, the paging occasion is a value obtained by renumbering radio frames excluding DRX.

  The above-mentioned parameters for MBMS reception time missing reception may be notified of necessary parameters according to the paging group used and the calculation formula of the paging occasion (paging occasion). For example, as a parameter for missing reception of MBMS reception time, in the above paging approximation calculation formula, discontinuous reception cycle, X, X value (remainder value of X) and radio frame number (SFN) in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer , TX, K, K values (remainder values of K) and subframes. These parameters for reception without MBMS reception time may be reported to the mobile terminal via the BCCH from the MBMS dedicated cell in ST1723 and ST1724 together with information related to MCCH scheduling. In addition, MBMS area information, DRX information for unicast / mixed frequency layer measurement, and the number of paging groups may be notified from the MBMS dedicated cell to the mobile terminal via MCCH in ST1728 and ST1729. Here, it is only required to be notified of the parameters necessary for the paging-acquisition calculation formula. However, not only the paging-acquisition, but a parameter indicating which timing (SFN) the mobile terminal should receive during the intermittent reception operation. If it is good. Specific examples include explicit reception timing (SFN) and intermittent reception cycle. The relationship between the X value (residue value of X) and the radio frame number (SFN) and the relationship between the K value (residue value of K) and the subframe may be determined in advance without using parameters. For example, when the number of subframes on which a paging signal is carried is K, when the K remainder value is 0, the first subframe in which the paging signal in the radio frame is carried, and when the K remainder value is 1, the paging signal When the remainder value of K is K−1, it is the last Kth subframe in which the paging signal in the radio frame is carried. By doing so, the amount of signaling can be reduced, and the transmission capacity of the MBMS service can be increased.

  As described above, with respect to the physical area on which the paging signal is carried, a paging dedicated physical channel (DPCH) disclosed in the eighth embodiment for multi-cell transmission in the MBSFN area is provided, and the paging signal is transmitted on the physical channel. Can be applied. In this case, the DPCH does not need to be configured in all radio frames corresponding to the MBSFN area, and may be configured in a radio frame in which paging occasions occur. Further, the DPCH may be configured in all MBSFN subframes in one radio frame or may be configured in K MBSFN subframes. As a result, data for the MBMS service can be transmitted in a radio frame that does not constitute the DPCH, so that the speed and capacity of the MBMS service can be increased. By adopting such a paging signal notification method, even when a DRX period is provided in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer, the MBMS dedicated cell can notify the paging signal in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer of the LTE system. The effect of becoming can be obtained. In the paging method according to the present invention, since communication after paging is performed by a unicast cell, only paging indicator (Paging Indicator: PI) for notifying whether there is an incoming call may be used as paging information transmitted by the base station. Also in this case, the DPCH configuration disclosed in the eighth embodiment can be applied.

Embodiment 12 FIG.
In the second embodiment, a method for transmitting a paging signal from all cells in the MBSFN area that transmits the MBMS service that the mobile terminal is receiving or is about to receive has been disclosed. Here, regardless of the presence or absence of MBSFN areas that cover a plurality of MBSFN areas, the mobile terminal can receive a paging signal in the MBMS dedicated frequency layer. A method of transmitting from all cells in the MBSFN Synchronization Area is disclosed. In the description, the description will focus on parts that are different from the second embodiment. Portions that are not particularly described are the same as in the second embodiment.

  A main PMCH used for multi-cell transmission in all cells in the MBSFN synchronization area is used as a physical channel for carrying a paging signal. The main PMCH has been disclosed in the ninth embodiment. The main PMCH is configured to be synchronized in all cells in the MBSFN synchronization area, and SFN synthesis is performed. This is because one MBSFN area to which all cells in the MBSFN synchronization area belong is provided, and the MBSFN subframe corresponding to the MBSFN area may be used as the main PMCH. Here, a case where time division multiplexing and code division multiplexing are mixed as a PMCH provided for each MBSFN area will be described as an example. FIG. 49 shows a configuration of a physical channel (main PMCH) transmitted in multicell within the MBSFN synchronization area. Cell # n1 is a cell in MBSFN area 1, cell # n2 is a cell in MBSFN area 2, and cell # n3 is a cell in MBSFN area 3. Further, the cells # n1, # n2, and # n3 are also cells in the MBSFN area 4. The main PMCH is provided by time-division multiplexing with MBSFN subframes for other MBSFN areas, and is transmitted in a repetition period main PMCH repetition period. Since a specific configuration is disclosed in the ninth embodiment, a description thereof will be omitted.

  A process flow of the mobile communication system in the present embodiment will be described. Since the paging signal is on the main PMCH transmitted in multi-cells in all cells in the MBSFN synchronization area, the method for notifying the paging signal to the mobile terminal is different from that in the second embodiment. Differences from the method disclosed in the second embodiment are mainly described. First, in addition to information related to MCCH scheduling such as the MCCH repetition period, scheduling information of the main PMCH must be notified to the mobile terminal. Specifically, the main PMCH scheduling information includes main PMCH start timing (SFN, starting point), main PMCH repetition period, subframe number, paging signal presence / absence indicator repetition period, MBMS-related change presence / absence indicator repetition period, These are the start timing (SFN, starting point) of the existing MBSFN subframe, subframe number, and the like. The scheduling information of the main PMCH may be notified from the DMBMS to the mobile terminal via BCCH in ST1723 and ST1724 together with the information related to the scheduling of the MCCH, or for MBMS area information and unicast / mixed frequency layer measurement. In addition to the DRX information and the number of paging groups, the mobile terminal may be notified from the MBMS dedicated cell via MCCH in ST1728 and ST1729.

  The scrambling code used in the MCH / PCH / main PCH mapped to the main PMCH is transmitted by multicell in the MBSFN synchronization area, so that the scrambling corresponding to the MBSFN area (for example, MBSFN area 1) to which the searched MBMS dedicated cell belongs. Different from ring code. Therefore, the scrambling code needs to be notified to the mobile terminal. The scrambling code may be notified from the MBMS dedicated cell to the mobile terminal via BCCH in ST1723 and ST1724 together with the scheduling information of the main PMCH, or from the MBMS dedicated cell in ST1728 and ST1729. May be notified to the mobile terminal. The mobile terminal receives the main PMCH based on the main PMCH scheduling information received in ST1724 or ST1729, and descrambles and decodes the main PMCH using the scrambling code received in ST1724 or ST1729 ( decode). Since the scrambling code is used in all cells in the MBSFN synchronization area, the scrambling code may be determined in advance, or f that can be received in the own cell from the serving cell in the broadcast regarding the receivable MBMS in ST1707 and ST1708. (MBMS) may be transmitted to the mobile terminal. The number of paging groups K (Kmp) used in the main PMCH channel configuration described in the ninth embodiment is the same as in the second embodiment in the MBSFN area (to which the searched MBMS dedicated cell belongs) in ST1728 and ST1729. For example, it is included in the MCCH of MBSFN area 1) and transmitted from the MBMS dedicated cell to the mobile terminal. The mobile terminal uses the paging group number Kmp to calculate a paging group as a preparation for MBMS reception time missing reception in ST1735.

  Next, a tracking area (TA) list at a frequency dedicated to MBMS transmission will be described. Since the main PMCH is transmitted by multi-cell transmission in all cells in the MBSFN synchronization area, the notification range of the paging signal to the mobile terminal can be all in the MBSFN synchronization area. For this reason, the tracking area of the MBMS transmission dedicated cell can be all within the MBSFN synchronization area. In Embodiment 2, FIG. 31 [a] shows a TA list of each mobile terminal, and FIG. 31 [b] shows a correspondence table between TAs (unicast) and cells belonging to a unicast / mixed frequency layer. These can also be applied to this embodiment. Next, in the present embodiment, a table for newly associating the tracking area (TA) with the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency and the MBMS synchronization area is provided. FIG. 64 shows a specific example of a table indicating a tracking area (TA) at a frequency dedicated to MBMS transmission. FIG. 64 [a] shows a table of the MBSFN area ID and f (MBMS) number and the MBMS synchronization area number (ID) to which the MBSFN area ID and f (MBMS) number belong. Using this table, the MBMS synchronization area number is related from the MBSFN area ID and the f (MBMS) number. FIG. 64B shows a table showing the relationship between the MBMS synchronization area ID and the TA (MBMS) number. As a result, the TA (MBMS) number in the MBMS dedicated frequency layer to which the MBSFN area received by the mobile terminal belongs is associated.

  Details of TA list management will be described. In the second embodiment, the method disclosed in the reception status on the MBMS side is applicable. As shown in FIG. 20, in step ST1742, the mobile terminal transmits an “MBMS side reception status notification” to the serving cell according to the UL allocation received in step ST1741. Examples of parameters included in the “MBMS side reception status notification” include mobile terminal identifiers (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.), MBMS service reception frequency (f (MBMS)), MBSFN area number (ID )and so on. In Step ST1743, the serving cell receives an MBMS-side reception status notification from the mobile terminal. In step ST1743, the network side receives the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission without adding an uplink to the MBMS dedicated cell, that is, without increasing the complexity as a mobile communication system. You can know that it is. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to change from the configuration in which the network side notifies the normal paging signal to the MBMS reception time missing configuration. In Step ST1744, the serving cell transmits an MBMS side reception status notification to the MME. In Step ST1745, the MME receives the MBMS side reception status notification from the serving cell. In Step ST1746, the MME determines a tracking area (hereinafter referred to as TA (MBMS)) that is receiving the MBMS service at the frequency dedicated to MBMS transmission of the mobile terminal. When determining the tracking area, based on the MBMS side reception status notification, more specifically, based on the MBMS side reception status parameter, more specifically, based on f (MBMS) and MBSFN area number in the parameter. decide. When f (MBMS) and the MBMS synchronization area have a one-to-one correspondence, the MBSFN area number need not be used. Specifically, the MBSFN area ID is not included in the table of FIG. Also, the MBSFN area number is not included in the MBMS side reception status parameters of ST1742 to ST1745. By doing so, it becomes possible to reduce the amount of signaling between the mobile terminal and the serving cell, and between the serving cell and the MME, and the efficiency of radio resources can be improved.

  In step ST1747, the tracking area list of the mobile terminal is updated. In the current 3GPP, it is determined to have a plurality of tracking areas for one mobile terminal in the unicast / mixed frequency layer (hereinafter referred to as TA (unicast)). However, at the present stage where it is not determined whether or not to transmit a paging signal to the mobile terminal from the MBMS dedicated cell or in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, the MBMS dedicated cell and MBMS transmission dedicated The frequency layer is not taken into consideration. In Step ST1747, the TA list including TA (unicast) and / or TA (MBMS) is managed (saved, added, updated, deleted). Details of the management of the TA list in step ST1747 will be described. The MME searches for the TA (MBMS) number managed in the MME based on the f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID received in step ST1745. As a specific search method, for example, the table of FIG. 64 is used. From the received f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID, the corresponding MBMS synchronization area number (ID) is searched using FIG. 64 [a], and the corresponding TA (MBMS) number is searched using FIG. 64 [b]. To do. Next, it is determined whether TA (MBMS) found as a result of the search exists in the TA list of the mobile terminal.

  If it exists, the current TA list is saved. If not, the TA (MBMS) is added to the TA list of the mobile terminal. In Step ST1748, the MME transmits an MBck side reception status notification Ack to the serving cell. As a parameter example included in the Ack of the MBMS side reception status notification, the TA list of the mobile terminal can be considered. In Step ST1749, the serving cell receives an Ack of MBMS side reception status notification from the MME. In Step ST1750, the serving cell transmits Ack of MBMS side reception status notification to the mobile terminal. In Step ST1751, the mobile terminal receives an Ack of MBMS side reception status notification from the serving cell. In Step ST1752, the mobile terminal changes the set frequency of the frequency conversion section 1107 and moves to the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission by changing the center frequency to the frequency of the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission (f (MBMS)). .

  Next, details of the processing when paging occurs in the mobile terminal according to the present embodiment will be described. In step ST1773, paging occurs to the mobile terminal. In Step ST1774, the MME confirms the TA list of the mobile terminal based on the identifier (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.) of the mobile terminal where paging has occurred. In Step ST1775, the MME determines whether TA (MBMS) is included in the TA list of the mobile terminal. As a specific example, the TA list of the mobile terminal is searched based on the UE-ID in the list as shown in FIG. When the mobile terminal is UE # 1 (UE-ID # 1) in FIG. 31 [a], it is determined that TA (MBMS) is not included. On the other hand, if the mobile terminal is UE # 2 (UE-ID # 2) in FIG. 31 [a], it is determined that TA (MBMS) is included because TA (MBMS) # 1 is included. To do. When TA (MBMS) is not included, it transfers to step ST1814. If TA (MBMS) is included, the process proceeds to step ST1776. In Step ST1776, the MME transmits a paging request to the MCE. As MCEs that transmit a paging request from the MME, all MCEs that manage base stations that are geographically overlapped with the base stations managed by the MME are conceivable. Specific examples of parameters in the paging request include mobile terminal identifiers (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.), TA (MBMS) numbers, and the like. At this time, f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID or MBSFN synchronization area ID may be used instead of the TA (MBMS) number.

  In step ST1777, the MCE receives the paging request. Of the MCEs that have received the paging request in step ST1778, control the MBSFN synchronization area ID or f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID, which are notified as parameters in the paging request, associated with the TA (MBMS) number. The MCE that is present prepares for paging transmission. As a specific example of preparation for paging transmission, the paging group of the mobile terminal is calculated using the number of paging groups Kmp used in the main PMCH and the received paging request. In the calculation, the same formula as that used on the mobile terminal side is used. As a specific example, the same paging group = IMSI mod Kmp as in step ST1735 is used. As described above, the MCE side that has received the paging request has information for attaching the TA (MBMS) number and the MCE as shown in the table of FIG. 64, and the method for managing the attachment is the MBSFN synchronization area ID. Alternatively, since the relationship between the f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID and the MCE that controls it can be performed only within the architecture of the MBMS service, that is, independent of the MME, a mobile communication system with a high degree of freedom is constructed. The effect that it becomes possible can be acquired.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 64, the MME manages the f (MBMS) and MBSFN area IDs related to the TA (MBMS) number, and further, as shown in FIG. 65 [a], the f (MBMS) and MBSFN area IDs. And the case of managing the number of the MCE that controls it. In this case, in Step ST1776, the MME transmits a paging request only to the MCE that manages the f (MBMS) and MBSFN area IDs related to the TA (MBMS) number. As a specific example of the parameter in the paging request at that time, an identifier of the mobile terminal can be considered. FIG. 65 [a] shows a correspondence table between f (MBMS) and MBSFN area IDs and MCE numbers that control the IDs. However, instead of f (MBMS) and MBSFN area IDs, MBSFN synchronization area IDs and their control are controlled. It may be a correspondence table of MCE numbers. The MCE that has received the paging request in Step ST1778 prepares for paging transmission as described above. As described above, the method of managing the relationship between f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID and the MCE controlling the same in the MME reduces the number of MCEs to be notified from the MME to the MCE, thereby effectively using resources. Can be obtained. Further, since the amount of information to be notified is reduced, it is possible to obtain an effect that resources can be effectively used.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 64, the MME manages the f (MBMS) and MBSFN area IDs related to the TA (MBMS) number, and further, as shown in FIG. 65 [b], the f (MBMS) and MBSFN area IDs. Consider the case of managing the cell IDs of MBMS dedicated cells and / or mixed cells included therein. In this case, in step ST1776, the MME transmits a paging request to the cell included in the MBSFN area ID managed by the MME, not the MCE. As a specific example of the parameter in the paging request at that time, an identifier of the mobile terminal can be considered. Also in this case, as in FIG. 65 [a], not the f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID in FIG. 65 [b], but the MBSFN synchronization area ID and the cell ID of the MBMS dedicated cell or / and the mixed cell included therein. It may be a correspondence table. As described above, the method for managing the relationship between f (MBMS) and MBSFN area IDs and the cells included therein in the MME does not require the MCE to perform processing related to paging signal transmission of the mobile terminal. This eliminates the need to add a function to the MCE, so that the effect of avoiding the complexity of the MCE can be obtained. In addition, an effect of reducing the processing load of the MCE can be obtained. Since the method disclosed in the ninth embodiment can be applied to the channel configuration for mapping the paging signal in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer, description thereof is omitted here.

  In Step ST1779, the MCE schedules the paging signal of the mobile terminal. Specifically, it is determined to which number of information elements mapped to the physical area assigned to the paging group number of the mobile terminal calculated in step ST1778 is assigned the mobile terminal identifier. Here, unlike the method disclosed in the second embodiment, the physical area in which the paging signal is carried is a physical area for main PMCH transmitted in multi-cells in the MBSFN synchronization area. Bases included in the MBSFN synchronization area are performed by the MBSFN synchronization area ID associated with the TA (MBMS) received in ST1777 or the MCE controlling the fS (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID. The identifier of the mobile terminal is transmitted from the same physical resource of the station. As a result, the mobile terminal can receive the paging signal benefiting from the SFN gain by receiving the main PMCH transmitted in multicell in the MBSFN synchronization area. In Step ST1780, the MCE transmits a paging request for the mobile terminal to the base station in the MBSFN area. As specific examples of the parameters included in the paging request, the mobile terminal identifier (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.), the scheduling result of the paging signal performed in step ST1779 (specifically, the SFN of the main PMCH, MBSFN subframe number, information element number) and the like are conceivable. In step ST1781, each base station in the MBSFN area receives a paging request from the MCE.

  In Step ST1782, each base station in the MBSFN area calculates the mobile terminal paging group. As a specific example of the calculation method, the paging group of the mobile terminal is calculated using the number of paging groups Kmp used in the main PMCH and the received paging request. In the calculation, the same formula as that used on the mobile terminal side is used. As a specific example, the same paging group = IMSI mod Kmp as in step ST1735 is used. If the paging group of the mobile terminal is also notified in step ST1780, step ST1782 can be omitted. Thereby, the effect of reducing the control load of each base station in the MBSFN area can be obtained. On the other hand, in the method of calculating the paging group in each base station in the MBSFN area in step ST1782 without notifying the paging group of the mobile terminal in step ST1780, notification information from the MCE to each base station in the MBSFN area Can be reduced, and the effect of effective use of resources can be obtained. In step ST1783, each base station in the MBSFN area uses the identifier of the mobile terminal received in step ST1781, the scheduling result of the paging signal, the paging group of the mobile terminal calculated in step ST1782, and the PMCH. Instead, the main PMCH carrying the paging signal is transmitted. The method described in the ninth embodiment can be used as a mapping method to a paging-related area in the main PMCH and a specific physical channel mapping method.

  In Step ST1784, the mobile terminal receives the paging-related change presence / absence indicator corresponding to the paging group calculated in Step ST1735 of the own mobile terminal in the main PMCH, not in the PMCH. In Step ST1785, the mobile terminal determines whether there is a change in the paging-related change presence / absence indicator. When there is no change, it transfers to step ST1788. If there is a change, the process proceeds to step ST1786. In Step ST1786, the mobile terminal continues to receive and decode the physical area to which the paging related information of the own paging group is mapped. At that time, blind detection is performed by performing a correlation calculation with an identification code unique to the mobile terminal. In step ST1787, the mobile terminal determines whether the identifier of the mobile terminal has been detected in the blind detection performed in step ST1786. When not detected, it transfers to step ST1788. If detected, the process proceeds to step ST1814. By adopting the method as described above, the mobile terminal can receive a paging signal in the MBMS dedicated frequency layer regardless of the presence or absence of an MBSFN area covering a plurality of MBSFN areas.

  In the present embodiment, a method for transmitting a paging request from the MME to the MCE as in the second embodiment has been described. As another method, a paging request may be transmitted from the MME to the MBMSGW instead of from the MME to the MCE. More specifically, it may be transmitted from the MME to the MBMSCP in the MBMSGW. This is because the channel on which the paging signal is carried is transmitted by multicell within the MBSFN synchronization area. The MBMSCP that has received the paging request transmits the paging request directly to the eNB without going through the MCE. In this case, an IF between the MME 103 and the MBMSGW 802 or the MBMSSCP 802-1 may be newly provided in the overall architecture of the mobile communication system used in the present invention disclosed in FIG. Using this IF, the paging request is transmitted from the MME to the MBMSGW or the MBMSCP. The MBMSGW or MBMSCP that has received the paging request transmits a paging request signal to all eNBs in the MBSFN synchronization area using the IF of M1.

  Next, processing when paging occurs in the mobile terminal in this case will be described. In step ST1773, paging occurs to the mobile terminal. In Step ST1774, the MME confirms the TA list of the mobile terminal based on the identifier (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.) of the mobile terminal where paging has occurred. In Step ST1775, the MME determines whether TA (MBMS) is included in the TA list of the mobile terminal. When TA (MBMS) is not included, it transfers to step ST1814. If TA (MBMS) is included, the process proceeds to step ST1776. In Step ST1776, the MME transmits a paging request to the MBMSCP instead of the MCE. As the MBMSCP that transmits a paging request from the MME, all MBMSCPs that manage the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission that can be received from the base station managed by the MME can be considered. Specific examples of parameters in the paging request include mobile terminal identifiers (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.), TA (MBMS) numbers, and the like. At this time, f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID or MBSFN synchronization area ID may be used instead of the TA (MBMS) number. In step ST1777, not MCE but MBMSCP receives the paging request. Controlling the MBSFN synchronization area ID associated with the TA (MBMS) number, or f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID, notified as a parameter in the paging request, of the MBMSCPs that received the paging request in step ST1778 The MBMSCP that is present prepares for paging transmission. As a specific example of paging transmission preparation, the paging group of the mobile terminal is calculated using the number of paging groups Kmp used in the main PMCH and the received paging request. In the calculation, the same formula as that used on the mobile terminal side is used.

  As a specific example, the same paging group = IMSI mod Kmp as in step ST1735 is used. Since the method disclosed in the ninth embodiment can be applied to the channel configuration for mapping the paging signal in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer, description thereof is omitted here. In Step ST1779, the MBMSCP performs scheduling of the paging signal of the mobile terminal. Specifically, it is determined to which number of information elements mapped to the physical area assigned to the paging group number of the mobile terminal calculated in step ST1778 is assigned the mobile terminal identifier. By performing this scheduling by MBMSCP, the identifier of the mobile terminal is transmitted from the same physical resource of the base station included in the MBSFN synchronization area, not in the MBSFN area. As a result, the mobile terminal can receive the paging signal benefiting from the SFN gain by receiving the main PMCH transmitted in multicell in the MBSFN synchronization area. In Step ST1780, the MBMSCP transmits a paging request for the mobile terminal to the base station in the MBSFN synchronization area. Specific examples of parameters included in the paging request include mobile terminal identifiers (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.), scheduling results of paging signals performed in step ST1777 (specifically, SFN, MBSFN subframes) Number, information element number) and the like. In Step ST1781, each base station in the MBSFN synchronization area receives a paging request from MBMSCP.

In Step ST1782, each base station in the MBSFN synchronization area calculates the mobile terminal paging group. As a specific example of the calculation method, the paging group of the mobile terminal is calculated using the number of paging groups Kmp used in the main PMCH and the received paging request. In the calculation, the same formula as that used on the mobile terminal side is used. As a specific example, paging group = IMSI mod Kmp is used as in step ST1735. If the paging group of the mobile terminal is notified in step ST1780, step ST1782 can be omitted. Thereby, effects, such as reduction of the control load of each base station in the MBSFN synchronization area, can be obtained. On the other hand, in the method of calculating the paging group in each base station in the MBSFN synchronization area in step ST1782 without notifying the paging group of the mobile terminal in step ST1780, from the MBMSCP to each base station in the MBSFN synchronization area Notification information can be reduced, and the effect of effective use of resources can be obtained.
Each base station in the MBSFN synchronization area in step ST1783 uses the identifier of the mobile terminal received in step ST1781, the scheduling result of the paging signal, the paging group of the mobile terminal calculated in step ST1782, and the like. The main PMCH carrying the signal is transmitted. The method described in the ninth embodiment can be used as a mapping method to a paging-related area in the main PMCH and a specific physical channel mapping method.

  In Step ST1784, the mobile terminal receives the paging-related information presence / absence indicator corresponding to the paging group calculated in Step ST1735 of the own mobile terminal in the main PMCH, not in the PMCH. In Step ST1785, the mobile terminal determines the presence / absence of paging-related information using the paging-related information presence / absence indicator. When there is no change, it transfers to step ST1788. If there is a change, the process proceeds to step ST1786. In Step ST1786, the mobile terminal continues to receive and decode the physical area to which the paging related information of the own paging group is mapped. At that time, blind detection is performed by performing a correlation calculation with an identification code unique to the mobile terminal. In step ST1787, the mobile terminal determines whether the identifier of the mobile terminal has been detected in the blind detection performed in step ST1786. When not detected, it transfers to step ST1788. If detected, the process proceeds to step ST1814.

  By adopting the method as described above, the mobile terminal can receive a paging signal in the MBMS dedicated frequency layer regardless of the presence or absence of an MBSFN area covering a plurality of MBSFN areas. Although the case where MME and MBMSCP exist separately was shown above, MBMSCP may have the function of MME. This eliminates the need for a long-distance physical IF between the MME (or EPC) and the MBMSGW or MBMSSCP, so that the system can be configured at low cost and with high security. Further, the MME (or EPC) and the MBMSGW can be configured. Alternatively, since a signal delay between MBMSCPs can be reduced, a control delay, in this case, a paging control delay can be reduced.

  When the tracking area in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer is an MBSFN synchronization area or an MBSFN area as in this embodiment or Embodiment 2, the TA (MBMS) number is derived in the MME and each mobile terminal Although a method of adding to the TA list has been disclosed, each mobile terminal and f (MBMS) and MBSFN area IDs received by the mobile terminal may be directly listed without regard to the TA list. In this case, what is necessary is just to confirm what was made into this direct list instead of the TA list of the corresponding UE in ST1774. In this case, in ST1776 and ST1777, TA (MBMS) may not be transmitted / received, but f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID may be transmitted / received. This is possible because TA is not in cell units but in MBSFN area units or MBSFN synchronization area units.

  In this embodiment, the case where time division multiplexing and code division multiplexing are mixed as a PMCH provided for each MBSFN area has been described as an example. However, there is no overlapping MBSFN area, and the PMCH is provided for each MBSFN area. The present invention can also be applied to the case of TDM or CDM as the PMCH.

  Thus, it is possible to disclose a paging signal notification method and a mobile communication system therefor for a mobile terminal receiving an MBMS service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, which is the first problem of the present invention. As a result, the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated for MBMS transmission can also receive the paging signal.

  By adopting the method of notifying the paging signal in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer disclosed in the present embodiment, the main PMCH is carried in the same manner regardless of the MBSFN area of the MBMS service being received by the mobile terminal. Since the paging signal can be received by receiving the MBSFN subframe, even when the MBSFN area received by the mobile terminal is changed and the MBMS service is received, the processing can be simplified.

Embodiment 13 FIG.
In the second embodiment, a method for transmitting a paging signal from all cells in the MBSFN area that transmits the MBMS service that the mobile terminal is receiving or is about to receive has been disclosed. Further, the twelfth embodiment discloses a method for transmitting a paging signal from all cells in the MBSFN synchronization area. However, it is conceivable that the MBSFN area and the MBSFN synchronization area are geographically vast. In such a case, transmitting a paging signal for the mobile terminal from a cell that does not contribute to SFN combining in the mobile terminal wastes radio resources and causes a reduction in system capacity. Therefore, it becomes necessary to limit the cell that transmits the paging signal to a cell in which the mobile terminal exists and a neighboring cell. In order to satisfy these needs, an MBMS dedicated cell geographically corresponding to the serving cell on the unicast side of the mobile terminal is used as a tracking area, and the MBSFN area (or MBSFN synchronization area) belonging to the tracking area is used. A method for transmitting a paging signal from some of the cells is disclosed. In the description, the description will focus on parts that are different from the second embodiment. Portions that are not particularly described are the same as in the second embodiment.

  An MBSFN area that is being received or is being received by the mobile terminal, geographically corresponding to the tracking area on the unicast side of the mobile terminal, in order to limit the cell that transmits the paging signal to the cell in which the mobile terminal exists and the neighboring cells. An arbitrary MBMS dedicated cell within the MBSFN synchronization area is set as the tracking area. The MBMS dedicated frequency layer base stations are arranged in the same way as the unicast / mixed frequency layer cells, but the base stations are shared, but the devices (antennas, etc.) are unicast / mixed for the MBMS dedicated frequency layer. It is conceivable to provide both for the frequency layer, or to arrange an MBMS dedicated frequency layer base station in a part of a cell of the unicast / mixed frequency layer for spot MBMS service. In order to geographically correspond the tracking area of the unicast side and the tracking area of the MBMS dedicated cell, in the former case, the same cell for the MBMS dedicated frequency layer as the cell in the tracking area in the unicast / mixed frequency layer is used. A cell in the tracking area may be used. In the latter case, a cell for the MBMS dedicated frequency layer existing in the tracking area in the unicast / mixed frequency layer may be a cell in the tracking area. FIG. 66 shows an example in which an arbitrary MBMS dedicated cell in one MBSFN area is used as a tracking area. In the MBSFN area (MBSFN area 1) of the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer, the MBMS dedicated cell (tracking area TA (MBMS) # 1 in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer) and the MBMS dedicated cell other than that are configured by hatching . In the figure, a TA (MBMS) geographically corresponding to the tracking area (TA (unicast) # 1) in the unicast / mixed frequency layer is configured. The paging signal is transmitted from the MBMS dedicated cell in TA (MBMS) # 1, and the paging signal is not transmitted from other MBMS dedicated cells. In this case, in the same MBSFN area (or in the same MBSFN synchronization area), a cell that transmits a paging signal to a certain mobile terminal and a cell that does not transmit are generated, so that different signals are transmitted between the cells and multi-cell transmission is not performed. End up. Since the mobile terminal cannot selectively limit the cells to be received, a signal that is no longer multi-cell transmission is also received, causing a reception error.

  The reception quality of a desired paging signal deteriorates due to a different signal transmitted from a cell that does not transmit a paging signal. In particular, a reception error increases for a mobile terminal that exists near the boundary between a cell that transmits a paging signal and a cell that does not transmit a paging signal, and a paging signal cannot be received. The channel configuration for paging signals for solving these problems has been disclosed in the tenth embodiment. Here, the method disclosed in the tenth embodiment is applied to the channel configuration for the paging signal. A case where code division multiplexing is performed as a PMCH provided for each MBSFN area will be described as an example. FIG. 40 shows the configuration of PMCH provided for each MBSFN area. Cell # n1 is a cell in MBSFN area 1, cell # n2 is a cell in MBSFN area 2, and cell # n3 is a cell in MBSFN area 3. PMCH corresponding to MBSFN area 1 is transmitted in the cell of cell # n1, PMCH corresponding to MBSFN area 2 is transmitted in the cell of cell # n2, and similarly, PMCH corresponding to MBSFN area 3 is transmitted in the cell of cell # n3. Is sent. The PMCH may be continuous in time or discontinuous. In the case of discontinuity, the cycle in which the MBSFN frame cluster (MBSFN frame cluster) in which the PMCH corresponding to the MBSFN area is transmitted is the MBSFN frame cluster repetition period. In addition, the MBSFN frame cluster repetition period in the case of continuous may be 0 or may not be specified. MCCH and MTCH may be temporally divided and mapped onto PMCH, or may be further temporally divided and mapped to a physical region that is transmitted in multicell. For example, MBSFN subframes that are physical areas to which MTCH and MCCH are mapped as a result may be different. A cycle in which the MCCH is repeated is defined as an MCCH repetition period.

  As for the configuration of the physical area for the paging signal, as disclosed in FIG. 41, a method of placing the paging signal on the PMCH together with the MCCH, a method of mapping the paging signal to the PMCH as one of the information elements of the MCCH, and a method of using an indicator , A method of grouping mobile terminals, a method of providing a paging signal by providing a paging dedicated channel as disclosed in FIG. 45, and a paging signal by providing a main PMCH as disclosed in FIG. The method of putting can be applied. When mapping the paging signal to the physical area where the paging signal is carried, the mapping method is changed between the cell that transmits the paging signal and the cell that does not transmit the paging signal. For example, in the MBSFN area, when there is a cell that transmits a paging signal to a mobile terminal that receives an incoming call and a cell that does not transmit, a cell that transmits a paging signal to a mobile terminal that receives an incoming call. The base station uses the switch 2401 to connect the switch to the terminal a as disclosed in FIG. The paging signal to the mobile terminal is multiplied by an identification number unique to the mobile terminal, CRC is added, and processing such as encoding and rate matching is performed. Since the switch 2401 is connected to the terminal a, the information after the above processing for each mobile terminal is assigned to a certain information element unit. In a cell that does not transmit a paging signal to a mobile terminal that is receiving an incoming call, the base station uses a switch 2401 to connect the switch to the terminal b as disclosed in FIG. A padding code is provided for each cell without using a paging signal to the mobile terminal, and the padding code is assigned to a certain information element unit.

  Here, the area of the information element unit allocated to a certain mobile terminal is the same in a cell that transmits a paging signal and a cell that does not transmit. As a result, the base station can easily switch the information allocated between the cell that transmits the paging signal and the cell that does not transmit the paging signal by the switch. Furthermore, by making the size of the information element unit area allocated to a certain mobile terminal the same for all mobile terminals, it is possible to determine the padding code length for each cell in advance. Thus, padding code embedding control can be easily configured. As a specific example of the padding code for each cell provided in the cell not transmitting the paging signal, as shown in FIG. 54, for example, all0 and all1 are used. In this way, the mobile terminal has an interference canceling function such as an interference canceller in the receiver, so that the mobile terminal can cancel the “0” or “1” component transmitted from the cell that does not transmit the paging signal. Therefore, only the paging signal transmitted from the cell transmitting the paging signal can be SFN-combined. Alternatively, a random value may be used. In this case, a random value is derived for each cell and padded. In this way, in the mobile terminal, the signals transmitted from the cells that do not transmit the paging signal are canceled each other due to different random signals, and the paging signal components transmitted from the cell that transmits the paging signal are relative to each other. Therefore, it is possible to reduce paging signal reception errors in the correlation calculation. Therefore, it is possible to receive a paging signal even when there are a cell that transmits a paging signal to a mobile terminal and a cell that does not transmit to the mobile terminal in the MBSFN area. A more detailed paging signal channel configuration has been described in Embodiment 10 and will not be described here.

  Next, a tracking area (TA) list at a frequency dedicated to MBMS transmission will be described. In order to limit the cell that transmits the paging signal to the cell where the mobile terminal exists and the neighboring cells, the mobile terminal is receiving or is about to receive in the MBSFN area geographically corresponding to the serving cell on the unicast side of the mobile terminal. Alternatively, any MBMS dedicated cell in the MBSFN synchronization area is set as a tracking area (TA (MBMS)). Here, a method will be described in which an arbitrary MBMS dedicated cell in the MBSFN area being received or about to be received by the mobile terminal is used as a TA. In Embodiment 2, FIG. 31 [a] shows a TA list of each mobile terminal, and FIG. 31 [b] shows a correspondence table between a tracking area (TA (unicast)) and a cell belonging to a unicast / mixed frequency layer. Indicated. These can also be applied to this embodiment. In Embodiment 2, a table associating f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID and TA (MBMS) number as shown in FIG. 31 [c] is provided, and the mobile terminal is receiving or is about to receive f ( The tracking area in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer can be derived from the MBMS) and MBSFN area ID. In the present embodiment, there are cells that transmit a paging signal and cells that do not transmit in the MBSFN area, so that the tracking area in the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer is simply associated with f (MBMS) and MBSFN area ID. I can't. In order to solve this problem, here, a table for associating TA (MBMS) ID with f (MBMS) and TA (unicast) ID is provided, and further, TA (MBMS) ID, TA (unicast), and geographic A table that associates MBMS transmission-dedicated cells corresponding to the above is provided. FIG. 67 shows a specific example of a table indicating TA (MBMS). 67 (a) is a table that associates TA (MBMS) ID with f (MBMS) and TA (unicast) ID, and FIG. 67 (b) is geographically associated with TA (MBMS) ID and TA (unicast). The table which associates an MBMS transmission-only cell is shown. According to these tables, the MBMS transmission dedicated cell geographically corresponding to the TA (unicast) is identified using the TA (MBMS), and the paging signal transmission is limited to the cells in the TA (MBMS). In the cell, it is possible to provide a cell that transmits a paging signal and a cell that does not transmit.

  Details of TA list management will be described. The method disclosed in the reception status on the MBMS side in the second embodiment can be applied. At this time, in step ST1746 of FIG. 20, in the process of determining the TA (MBMS) of the mobile terminal, the MME determines the tracking area based on the TA (unicast) ID and the MBMS side reception status notification content. Change to determine. The MBMS-side reception status notification content may be determined more specifically based on the MBMS-side reception status parameter, and more specifically based on f (MBMS) in the parameter. Also, in managing the tracking area list of the mobile terminal in step ST1747, the MME manages in the MME based on f (MBMS) received in step ST1745 and TA (unicast) determined in ST1714 to ST1716. Change to search for existing TA (MBMS) number. As a specific search method, for example, the table of FIG. 67 [a] is used. Next, it is determined whether or not a TA (MBMS) found as a result of the search exists in the TA list of the mobile terminal (FIG. 31 [a]). If it exists, the current TA list is saved. If not, the TA (MBMS) is added to the TA list of the mobile terminal. As described above, by changing a part of the MBMS-side reception status notification process disclosed in the second embodiment, it is possible to manage the TA according to the present embodiment.

  In the above example, in ST 1742, the mobile terminal notifies the serving cell of the MBSFN area number that is being received or is about to be received, as in Embodiment 2, and further, in ST 1744, the serving cell notifies the MME of the MBSFN area number. I did it. However, in the invention according to the present embodiment, the MBSFN area number information is not necessary in managing TA (MBMS). Therefore, it is not necessary to notify the MBSFN area number in ST 1742 and ST 1744, and the amount of signaling between the mobile terminal and the serving cell and between the serving cell and the MME can be reduced.

  Next, details of the processing when paging occurs in the mobile terminal according to the present embodiment will be described. Here, in order to limit the cell that transmits the paging signal to the cell in which the mobile terminal exists and the neighboring cell, from any MBMS dedicated cell in the MBSFN area that geographically corresponds to the serving cell on the unicast side of the mobile terminal A case where a paging signal is transmitted will be described. In the MBMS reception time missing reception process disclosed in the second embodiment, as described above, the tracking area (TA (MBMS)) of the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer is changed to the tracking area (TA (unicast) of the unicast / mixed frequency layer. And the paging signal mapping method is changed so that different information is assigned to the cell that transmits the paging signal and the cell that does not transmit the paging signal. This will be described more specifically. In step ST1773, paging occurs to the mobile terminal. In Step ST1774, the MME confirms the TA list of the mobile terminal based on the identifier (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.) of the mobile terminal where paging has occurred. In Step ST1775, the MME determines whether TA (MBMS) is included in the TA list of the mobile terminal. As a specific example, the TA list of the mobile terminal is searched based on the UE-ID in the list as shown in FIG. If the mobile terminal is UE # 1 (UE-ID # 1) in FIG. 31 [a], it is determined that TA (MBMS) is not included. On the other hand, when the mobile terminal is UE # 2 (UE-ID # 2) in FIG. 31 [a], it is determined that TA (MBMS) is included because TA (MBMS) # 1 is included. To do. When TA (MBMS) is not included, it transfers to step ST1814. If TA (MBMS) is included, the process proceeds to step ST1776.

In Step ST1776, the MME transmits a paging request to the MCE. As MCEs that transmit a paging request from the MME, all MCEs that manage base stations that are geographically overlapped with the base stations managed by the MME can be considered. In addition, the MME has one or more MCE information corresponding to each MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer (f (MBMS)), and corresponds to it based on f (MBMS) notified from the mobile terminal. A paging request may be transmitted to one or a plurality of MCEs. This is also possible in the second embodiment. Specific examples of parameters in the paging request include mobile terminal identifiers (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.), TA (MBMS) numbers, and the like. At this time, f (MBMS) and TA (unicast) number may be used instead of the TA (MBMS) number. In step ST1777, the MCE receives the paging request. Of the MCEs that have received the paging request in step ST1778, are dedicated as MBMS, which are notified as parameters in the paging request, are associated with the TA (MBMS) number, or are associated with f (MBMS) and the TA (unicast) number The MCE controlling the cell prepares for paging transmission. As a specific example of paging transmission preparation, the same method as in the second embodiment can be applied. The paging group of the mobile terminal is calculated using the paging group number KMBMS of the own base station (own MBSFN area) and the received paging request. In the calculation, the same formula as that used on the mobile terminal side is used. As a specific example, the same as in step ST1735, paging group = IMSI mod KMBMS
Is used. As described above, the method of managing the connection between the TA (MBMS) number and the MBMS dedicated cell on the MCE side that has received the paging request, specifically, in the second embodiment, FIG. 31 [c] In the present embodiment, a table showing the association information shown in FIG. 67 [b] is configured in the MCE, and the method of deriving using it is the relationship between the MBMS dedicated cell and the MCE controlling it. Can be performed only within the architecture of the MBMS service, that is, it can be performed independently of the MME, so that it is possible to obtain a mobile communication system with a high degree of freedom.

  In Step ST1779, the MCE schedules the paging signal of the mobile terminal. Specifically, it is determined to which number of information elements mapped to the physical area assigned to the paging group number of the mobile terminal calculated in step ST1778 is assigned the mobile terminal identifier. By performing this scheduling in the MCE, the identifier of the mobile terminal is transmitted from the same physical resource of the base station included in the MBSFN area. Thereby, the mobile terminal can receive the paging signal which received the benefit of SFN gain by receiving MCCH currently transmitted by multicell in the MBSFN area. In Step ST1780, the MCE transmits a paging request for the mobile terminal to the base station of the MBMS dedicated cell included in the MBSFN area controlled by the MCE. Specific examples of parameters included in the paging request include mobile terminal identifiers (UE-ID, IMSI, S-TMSI, etc.), and paging signal scheduling results (specifically, SFN and MBSFN subframes) performed in step ST1779. In addition to the information disclosed in the second embodiment such as the number and the information element number), paging transmission availability information is conceivable. The paging transmission availability information newly provided in the present embodiment is information indicating whether each MBMS dedicated cell transmits a paging signal. A specific example of the paging transmission permission information is 1 bit (“1”, “0”). In ST1780, the MCE transmits information “1” indicating that paging transmission is possible to the MBMS dedicated cell existing in the table using the table in FIG. 67B. Paging transmission rejection information “0” is transmitted to an MBMS dedicated cell that does not exist in the table of FIG. 67B. By providing information for whether or not paging transmission is possible and transmitting from the MCE to each MBMS dedicated cell, it is possible to provide a cell that transmits a paging signal and a cell that does not transmit the paging signal.

  In step ST1781, each base station in the MBSFN area controlled by the MCE receives a paging request from the MCE. The base station of the MBMS dedicated cell of TA (MBMS) shown in FIG. 67 [b] receives paging signal permission, and the base station of the other MBMS dedicated cell receives paging signal failure.

  Instead of providing an MME-MCE IF between the MME 103 and the MCE 801, an MME-MBMS GW interface may be provided between the MME 103 and the MBMS GW 802 (more specifically, MBMSCP802-1). Even if the processing contents of MCE from step ST1776 to step ST1780 are performed by the MBMS GW, the same effect as the present invention can be obtained.

  Also, consider the case where the MME manages the cell ID of an MBMS dedicated cell or / and a mixed cell related to the TA (MBMS) number as shown in FIG. 67 [b]. In this case, in step ST1776, the MME transmits a paging request to each MBMS dedicated cell in the MBSFN area managed by the MME, not the MCE. As a parameter in the paging request at that time, the above-described paging transmission permission / inhibition information is included in addition to the identifier of the mobile terminal. The MME transmits paging transmission permission information “1” to the MBMS dedicated cell included in the TA (MBMS) number shown in FIG. 67 [b], and paging transmission rejection information “0” to the MBMS dedicated cell not included. To do. As described above, in addition to TA (unicast) within the MME, the method of managing the relationship between the TA (MBMS) number and the cells included in the TA (MBMS) number (FIG. 67) It is not necessary to perform processing for recognizing a cell that transmits a paging signal and a cell that does not transmit, and transmitting individual paging transmission permission information to each cell according to the result. This eliminates the need to add a function to the MCE, so that the effect of avoiding the complexity of the MCE can be obtained. In addition, an effect of reducing the processing load of the MCE can be obtained.

  In Step ST1782, each base station in the MBSFN area calculates the mobile terminal paging group. As a specific example of the calculation method, the same method as in the second embodiment can be applied. The paging group of the mobile terminal is calculated using the paging group number KMBMS of the own base station (own MBSFN area) and the received paging request. In the calculation, the same formula as that used on the mobile terminal side is used. As a specific example, paging group = IMSI mod KMBMS is used as in step ST1735. If the paging group of the mobile terminal is also notified in step ST1780, step ST1782 can be omitted. Thereby, the reduction effect of the control load of each base station in the MBSFN area can be obtained. On the other hand, in the method of calculating the paging group in each base station in the MBSFN area in step ST1782 without notifying the paging group of the mobile terminal in step ST1780, notification information from the MCE to each base station in the MBSFN area Can be reduced, and the effect of effective use of resources can be obtained. Each base station in the MBSFN area in Step ST1783 uses the identifier of the mobile terminal received in Step ST1781, the scheduling result of the paging signal, the paging group of the mobile terminal calculated in Step ST1782, and the like. Alternatively, transmission is performed with a padding code or the like. In ST1781, the cell that has received the transmission permission information “1” as the paging transmission permission information places the paging signal on the PMCH, maps it to the MBSFN subframe corresponding to the MBSFN area, and transmits it. In ST1781, the cell that has received the transmission rejection information “0” as the paging transmission permission information is padded with the padding code instead of the paging signal and mapped to the MBSFN subframe corresponding to the MBSFN area and transmitted. Regarding the mapping method to the paging-related area in the PMCH and the method of changing the mapping method between the cell that transmits the paging signal and the cell that does not transmit the paging signal when mapping the paging signal to the physical area carrying the paging signal, Details have been described in Embodiment 2 and Embodiment 10, and therefore are omitted here.

  In Step ST1784, the mobile terminal receives a paging-related information presence / absence indicator transmitted from all cells in the MBSFN area in ST1783. As in the second embodiment, each MBMS dedicated cell maps the paging-related information presence / absence indicator in the physical area corresponding to the paging group of the corresponding mobile terminal calculated in ST1782 in ST1783. Therefore, the mobile terminal only has to receive the physical area corresponding to the paging group of the own mobile terminal calculated using the same formula in step ST1735. The repetition period and physical area of the paging-related information presence / absence indicator may be notified by broadcast information of the serving cell of the unicast service, may be notified by broadcast information of the MBMS dedicated cell, or may be determined in advance. In Step ST1785, the mobile terminal determines whether there is a change in the paging-related change presence / absence indicator. When there is no change, it transfers to step ST1788. If there is a change, the process proceeds to step ST1786. In Step ST1786, the mobile terminal continues to receive and decode the physical area to which the paging related information of the own paging group is mapped. At that time, blind detection is performed by performing a correlation calculation with an identification code unique to the mobile terminal. Since the MBSFN subframe is transmitted by multicell in the MBSFN, a signal transmitted from a cell that does not transmit a paging signal at the time of reception by the mobile terminal becomes noise. However, by adopting the method as disclosed above, the mobile terminal has an interference cancellation function such as an interference canceller in the receiver, thereby canceling the padding code component transmitted from the cell that does not transmit the paging signal. Therefore, only the paging signal transmitted from the cell transmitting the paging signal can be SFN combined. When the padding code is a random value, the mobile terminal need not have an interference canceling function such as an interference canceller in the receiver. Since each cell derives a random value for each cell and performs padding, a signal transmitted from a cell that does not transmit a paging signal is canceled by the mobile terminal due to different random signals. Since the paging signal component transmitted from the cell transmitting the signal becomes relatively strong, it is possible to reduce the paging signal reception error in the correlation calculation. In step ST1787, the mobile terminal determines whether the identifier of the mobile terminal has been detected in the blind detection performed in step ST1786. When not detected, it transfers to step ST1788. If detected, the process proceeds to step ST1814.

  By adopting the method as described above, the first problem of the present invention is a method for notifying a paging signal to a mobile terminal receiving an MBMS service in a frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission, and mobile communication therefor The system can be disclosed, and thereby, the paging signal can be received even in the mobile terminal receiving the MBMS service in the frequency layer dedicated to MBMS transmission. Furthermore, even if cells that transmit paging signals and cells that do not transmit are mixed, it is possible to reduce a reduction in reception error when receiving a paging signal in a mobile terminal. By providing the cells not to be transmitted, it is possible to limit the area for transmitting the paging signal to the cell in which the mobile terminal exists and the neighboring cells, and it is possible to reduce the waste of radio resources and increase the system capacity.

  In the above specific example, the case where code division multiplexing is performed as the PMCH provided for each MBSFN area has been described. The present invention is applicable not only to code division multiplexing but also to time division multiplexing for each MBSFN area.

  In addition to the case where a tracking area (TA (MBMS)) is configured by an arbitrary MBMS dedicated cell in one MBSFN area, it is dedicated to an arbitrary MBMS in a plurality of MBSFN areas as shown in FIG. The method disclosed in this embodiment can also be applied when a tracking area (TA (MBMS)) is configured by cells. In this case, the MCE that has received the paging request in step ST1778 is associated with the TA (MBMS) number, or is associated with the f (MBMS) and TA (unicast) number, which is notified as a parameter in the paging request. There are a plurality of MCEs controlling the MBMS dedicated cell. Also, in this case, the mobile terminal does not receive the paging signal from all MBMS dedicated cells in TA (MBMS), and belongs to one or more MBSFN areas that the mobile terminal is receiving or is about to receive. A paging signal is received from an MBMS dedicated cell in (MBMS). In ST1728, the number K of paging groups used in each MBSFN area is mapped to the MCCH from the MBMS dedicated cell belonging to each MBSFN area being received or about to be received by the mobile terminal. The mobile terminal receives the paging group number K in ST1729.

  As shown in FIG. 68 [b], when one cell belongs to a plurality of MBSFN areas and a tracking area (TA (MBMS)) is configured by any MBMS dedicated cell in the plurality of MBSFN areas. However, the above method is applicable. In this case, the method disclosed in the seventh embodiment can be applied as a channel configuration on which a paging signal or padding code is placed, and the paging signal or padding code is transferred to the physical area carrying the paging signal on the PMCH. As a mapping method, the method disclosed in the tenth embodiment can be applied.

  In the above specific example, the TA (MBMS) is configured by any MBMS dedicated cell in the MBSFN area so as to be a tracking area of the MBMS transmission dedicated frequency layer geographically corresponding to the serving cell on the unicast side of the mobile terminal. A method has been disclosed. For this reason, the paging operation shown in the present embodiment does not require transmission / reception of MBSFN area ID information that the mobile terminal is receiving or is about to receive in ST 1742 to ST 1745, ST 1776, and ST 1777. However, the MBSFN area ID may be further included in the information transmitted / received in ST 1742 to ST 1745, ST 1776, and ST 1777 in addition to the information shown in the specific example. When the MBSFN area ID is included, a tracking area (TA (MBMS)) is configured by arbitrary MBMS dedicated cells in a plurality of MBSFN areas, or one cell belongs to a plurality of MBSFN areas, When a tracking area (TA (MBMS)) is configured by arbitrary MBMS dedicated cells in a plurality of MBSFN areas, the MBMS dedicated cell for transmitting a paging signal may be further limited to the MBSFN area of the MBSFN area ID. It becomes possible.

  The MCE that has received the paging request including the MBSFN area ID information in ST1777 can determine whether to transmit the paging request to the MBMS dedicated cell based on the MBSFN area ID, and the control can be simplified. The MCE that controls the MBMS dedicated cell in the MBSFN area ID determines to transmit to the MBMS dedicated cell, and only the MCE transmits a paging request to the MBMS dedicated cell in ST1780. The MBMS dedicated cell that has received the paging request for the MBMS dedicated cell transmits the paging signal based on the paging transmission availability information, and the MBMS dedicated cell included in the TA (MBMS) number shown in FIG. A non-MBMS dedicated cell transmits a padding code instead of a paging signal. By adopting such a method, cells in the MBSFN area that the mobile terminal is not receiving and is not trying to receive do not need to transmit a paging signal, so that use of useless radio resources can be reduced, The effect of increasing the system capacity is obtained.

It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the communication system of a LTE system. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the communication system of a LTE system. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration of a radio frame used in an LTE communication system. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network) frame. It is explanatory drawing explaining the physical channel used with the communication system of a LTE system. It is explanatory drawing explaining the transport channel used with the communication system of a LTE system. It is explanatory drawing explaining the logical channel used with the communication system of a LTE system. It is explanatory drawing explaining the relationship between a MBSFN synchronous area and a MBSFN area. It is explanatory drawing explaining the logical structure (Logical Architecture) of E-MBMS. It is explanatory drawing explaining the architecture (Architecture) of E-MBMS. 1 is a block diagram showing an overall configuration of a mobile communication system according to the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a mobile terminal. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a base station. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of MME (Mobility Management Entity). It is a block diagram which shows the structure of MCE (Multi-cell / multicast Coordination Entity). It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a MBMS gateway. 4 is a flowchart illustrating an outline of processing from when a mobile terminal starts to use MBMS until the end of use in an LTE communication system. It is a flowchart explaining the cell selection by the side of a unicast. It is a flowchart which shows a MBMS search process. It is a flowchart which shows a MBMS service selection process. It is a flowchart which shows a MBMS side reception condition notification process. It is a flowchart explaining a unicast side measurement process. It is a flowchart explaining the intermittent reception process at the time of MBMS reception. It is a flowchart which shows a MTCH reception process and a MBMS reception end process. It is a flowchart which shows a unicast side intermittent reception process and a MBMS reception completion process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the some MBSFN area which comprises an MBSFN synchronous area. It is a conceptual diagram of the mapping to the physical channel of the MBSFN synchronization area when the MBSFN area is time division multiplexed. It is a conceptual diagram of mapping to the physical channel of the MBSFN synchronization area when the MBSFN area is code division multiplexed. It is explanatory drawing which shows several MBSFN area which comprises an MBSFN synchronous area, Comprising: It is explanatory drawing which shows the MBSFN area which covers several MBSFN area. Explanatory drawing which shows the mapping to the physical channel of the MBSFN synchronous area when the covered MBSFN area and the covered MBSFN area are time division multiplexed, and the multiplexing method between the covered MBSFN areas is code division multiplexing. It is. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the intermittent reception period when the transmission of MBMS data to a mobile terminal is stopped, and the reception operation | movement of MBMS data in a mobile terminal stops, and the intermittent reception period which is a period which performs intermittent reception. It is explanatory drawing explaining the detail of a tracking area list. It is an example of a channel structure which maps the paging signal in an MBMS transmission exclusive frequency layer. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the method of mapping a paging signal to the physical area | region where the paging signal on a physical multicast channel (PMCH) is carried. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the method of mapping a paging signal to the physical area | region where the paging signal on a physical multicast channel (PMCH) is carried. Explanatory drawing which shows the mapping to the physical channel of the MBSFN synchronous area when the covered MBSFN area and the covered MBSFN area are time division multiplexed, and the multiplexing method between the covered MBSFN areas is code division multiplexing. It is. It is explanatory drawing which shows the method of mapping the signal related to a paging to a multicast control channel in order to transmit control information to the MBSFN area containing a some MBSFN area. It is a flowchart which shows the process which measures the quality of the multicast control channel in reception. It is a table | surface which shows the concept of the capability of a mobile terminal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the physical multicast channel provided for every MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network) area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the physical multicast channel provided for every MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network) area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the physical multicast channel (PMCH) which carried the paging signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the method of mapping a paging signal to the area | region on a physical multicast channel. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the method of mapping a paging signal to the physical area | region where the paging signal on a physical multicast channel (PMCH) is carried. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of PMCH provided for every MBSFN area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the physical channel only for paging transmitted in multicell within an MBSFN area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a MBSFN sub-frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the method of mapping a paging signal to a paging exclusive channel (DPCH). It is explanatory drawing which shows the method of mapping a paging signal to a paging exclusive channel (DPCH). It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the physical channel (main PMCH) transmitted by multicell within a MBSFN synchronous area. It is explanatory drawing shown about the structure of the radio | wireless frame with which main PMCH is transmitted. It is explanatory drawing shown about the structure of the radio | wireless frame by which main PMCH is transmitted within the same sub-frame as the synchronization channel SCH. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of main PMCH which provided the area | region for paging signals. It is explanatory drawing which shows the method of transmitting a paging signal to the one part cell in a MBSFN area or a MBSFN synchronous area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the code for the padding for every cell provided with the cell which does not transmit a paging signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the method of using the code for paging transmission cell identification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mapping method in the case of putting MBMS relevant information and a paging signal on a multicast control channel (MCCH) as an information element. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mapping method in the case of multiplexing the logical channel PCCH with the logical channels MTCH and MCCH, and mounting on the transport channel MCH. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a mapping method when the logical channel PCCH is placed on the transport channel PCH, the logical channels MTCH and MCCH are multiplexed and placed on the transport channel MCH, and the PCH and MCH are multiplexed and placed on the physical multicast channel. is there. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mapping method in the case where a paging signal is put on the transport channel PCH on the logical channel PCCH, the logical channels MTCH and MCCH are multiplexed and put on the transport channel MCH, and the PCH is put on the physical channel dedicated to paging. . It is explanatory drawing which shows the mapping method at the time of providing main PMCH as a physical channel common to a MBSFN synchronous area. It is a figure explaining the MBSFN sub-frame structure for every MBSFN area in each cell when a DRX period is also taken into consideration. 218 is a flowchart illustrating MBMS reception time missing reception preparation processing in Embodiment 11. [FIG. 42 is a flowchart for describing intermittent reception processing during MBMS reception in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining details of a tracking area list in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining details of a tracking area list in the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure explaining that the arbitrary MBMS dedicated cell in one MBSFN area was made into the tracking area. 42 is a diagram for explaining details of a tracking area list in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a figure explaining that the tracking area is comprised by arbitrary MBMS dedicated cells in a plurality of MBSFN areas.

Explanation of symbols

101 mobile terminals, 102 base stations,
103 MME (Mobility Management Entity),
104 S-GW (Serving Gateway)

Claims (5)

A communication system that uses an OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) scheme as a downlink access scheme and an SC-FDMA (Single Career Frequency Division Multiple Access) scheme as an uplink access scheme, and is a one-to-many broadcast communication with respect to a mobile terminal In order to perform communication of broadcast data providing MBMS (Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service) as a service and one-to-one type individual communication data to the mobile terminal, a plurality of channels for MBMS communication and channels for individual communication are multiplexed. In a communication system using a radio frame identified by a system frame number
The communication system includes a unicast cell that is a cell in which a mobile terminal can transmit and receive the dedicated communication data, an MBMS dedicated cell that allows the mobile terminal to receive the broadcast type data but cannot transmit and receive the dedicated communication data, MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast), which includes three types of unicast / MBMS mixed cells capable of providing services of both unicast cells and MBMS dedicated cells, and in which a plurality of MBMS dedicated cells are synchronized with each other at a single frequency. multicast Single Frequency Network)
Of the plurality of subframes included in the radio frame, an MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network) subframe used for MBMS communication is notified to the mobile terminal that the arrival of the individual communication data has occurred. A communication system comprising a paging signal. The communication system according to claim 1, wherein the paging signal is mapped to all radio frames from 0 to a maximum value of the system frame number and transmitted to the mobile terminal. The communication system according to claim 1, wherein a physical channel is provided for carrying a paging signal in a part of the MBSFN subframe. A plurality of MBMS dedicated cells constituting the MBSFN synchronization area are provided with a reception stop period in which the mobile terminal does not receive the MBMS data by stopping transmission of MBMS data to the mobile terminal for a predetermined time, The communication system according to claim 1, wherein the paging signal is mapped to a radio frame excluding a radio frame corresponding to the reception suspension period. The communication system according to claim 1, wherein the paging signal is mapped to one or a plurality of periodic radio frames from 0 to a maximum value of the system frame number and transmitted to the mobile terminal.

Images